PROJECT MANUAL
Wallace Place Apartments 9 Unit Apartment
Loves Park, Illinois
HUD Project #071-HD169/IL06Q091011
Architect Project #10-9050
Owner: Wallace Place Apartments, NFP 4060 McFarland Road Loves Park, IL 61111
Architect: Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. 4000 Morsay Dr. Rockford, IL 61107 Professional Design Firm Registration No. 184003452
April 15, 2011
Wallace Place Apts. 10-9050
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING & CONTRACT DOCUMENTATION
00 1113 Bid Solicitation...... 00 1113-1 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders...... 00 2113-4 Bid Form ...... 1-2 Bid Bond ...... 1-2 Contractors and/or Mortgagor’s Cost Breakdown (HUD 2328) ...... 1-3 00 3100 Available Project Information...... 00 3100-1 Geotechnical Engineering Report...... 1-26 00 5000 Contracting Forms and Supplements...... 00 5000-1 CAP Construction Contract Lump Sum (HUD 92442-CA)...... 1-3 Supplementary Conditions of Contract for Construction (HUD 2554) ...... 1-4 00 7300 Supplementary Conditions ...... 00 7300-1-3
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000 Summary ...... 01 1000-1 01 2000 Price and Payment Procedures...... 01 2000-1-3 01 2100 Allowances ...... 01 2100-1 01 3000 Administrative Requirements ...... 01 3000-1-3 01 4000 Quality Requirements...... 01 4000-1-4 01 4216 Definitions...... 01 4216-1 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls...... 01 5000-1-2 01 5713 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control...... 01 5713-1-7 01 5813 Temporary Project Signs...... 01 5813-1 Example Project Sign...... 1 01 6000 Product Requirements...... 01 6000-1-3 Product Substitution Approval Form...... 1 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements...... 01 7000-1-6 01 7800 Closeout Submittals ...... 01 7800-1-4 HUD Survey Requirements ...... 1-2 HUD Survey Instructions and Report (HUD 92457) ...... 1-2
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing...... 03 2000-1-2 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete ...... 03 3000-1-7
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04 2001 Masonry Veneer ...... 04 2001-1-6
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 5000 Metal Fabrications ...... 05 5000-1-3
DIVISION 06 – FINISH CARPENTRY
06 1000 Rough Carpentry ...... 06 1000-1-4 06 1753 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses...... 06 1753-1-3 06 2000 Finish Carpentry ...... 06 2000-1-4 06 6150 Cast Marble Fabrications ...... 06 6150-1-3 06 8200 Plastic Fabrications ...... 06 8200-1-2
April 2011 1 of 4 Wallace Place Apts. 10-9050
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2100 Thermal Insulation...... 07 2100-1-3 07 2126 Blown Insulation ...... 07 2126-1-2 07 3113 Asphalt Shingles...... 07 3113-1-3 07 4633 Plastic Siding...... 07 4633-1-2 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...... 07 6200-1-2 07 6400 Aluminum Soffit ...... 07 6400-1-2 07 7100 Roof Specialties...... 07 7100-1-2 07 7123 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts...... 07 7123-1-2 07 8400 Firestopping...... 07 8400-1-3 07 9005 Joint Sealers...... 07 9005-1-4
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames...... 08 1113-1-4 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors...... 08 1416-1-3 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels ...... 08 3100-1-2 08 5400 Composite Windows...... 08 5400-1-4 08 7100 Door Hardware ...... 08 7100-1-16 08 8000 Glazing ...... 08 8000-1-5
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies ...... 09 2116-1-4 09 3000 Tile ...... 09 3000-1-3 09 5100 Acoustical Ceiling ...... 09 5100-1-3 09 6500 Resilient Flooring...... 09 6500-1-4 09 6800 Carpet...... 09 6800-1-3 09 9000 Painting and Coating ...... 09 9000-1-7
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 1440 Interior Signage ...... 10 1440-1-2 Interior Signage Schedule...... 1 10 1441 Exterior Signage...... 10 1441-1-2 10 2601 Wall and Corner Guards...... 10 2601-1-2 10 2800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories...... 10 2800-1-3 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties...... 10 4400-1-2 10 5100 Wire Mesh Lockers...... 10 5100-1-2 10 5520 Mail Boxes...... 10 5520-1-2 10 5623 Wire Storage Shelving...... 10 5623-1-2
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 3100 Residential Appliances...... 11 3100-1-2
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds...... 12 2113-1-2 12 3530 Residential Casework...... 12 3530-1-2 12 3600 Countertops...... 12 3600-1-3
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression...... 21 0500-1-4 21 0553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment...... 21 0553-1-3 21 1200 Fire Suppression Standpipes...... 21 1200-1-2
April 2011 2 of 4 Wallace Place Apts. 10-9050
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation...... 22 0719-1-5 22 1005 Plumbing Piping...... 22 1005-1-10 22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specifications...... 22 1006-1-4 22 3000 Plumbing Equipment...... 22 3000-1-3 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures...... 22 4000-1-5
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 0130.51 HVAC Air Duct Cleaning...... 23 0130.51-1-4 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping Equipment...... 23 0553-1-2 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC...... 23 0593-1-5 23 0713 Duct Insulation...... 23 0713-1-4 23 0913 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC...... 23 0913-1-3 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Castings...... 23 3100-1-3 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories...... 23 3300-1-3 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators...... 23 3423-1-2 23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets...... 23 3700-1-3 23 5400 Furnaces...... 23 5400-1-4 23 6313 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers...... 23 6313-1-2 23 8113 Packaged terminal Air-Conditioners...... 23 8113-1-2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables...... 26 0519-1-3 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems...... 26 0526-1-2 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems...... 26 0529-1-2 26 0534 Conduit...... 26 0533-1-4 26 0537 Boxes...... 26 0537-1-3 26 0553 Identification for Electrical System...... 26 0553-1-2 26 0919 Enclosed Contactors...... 26 0919-1-2 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices...... 26 0923-1-3 26 2416 Panelboards...... 26 2416-1-3 26 2701 Electrical Service Entrance...... 26 2701-1-2 26 2712 Equipment Wiring...... 26 2712-1-2 26 2726 Wiring Devices...... 26 2726-1-5 26 2813 Fuses...... 26 2813-1-2 26 2817 Enclosed Circuit Breakers...... 26 2817-1-2 26 2818 Enclosed Switches...... 26 2818-1-2 26 5100 Interior Lighting...... 26 5100-1-8 26 5600 Exterior Lighting...... 26 5600-1-3
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm...... 28 3100-1-6
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 1000 Site Clearing...... 31 1000-1-1 31 2200 Grading...... 31 2200-1-2 31 2316 Excavation...... 31 2316-1-2 31 2316.13 Trenching...... 31 2316.13-1-3 31 2323 Fill...... 31 2323-1-4
April 2011 3 of 4 Wallace Place Apts. 10-9050
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 0190 Operation and Maintenance of Planting...... 32 0190-1-4 32 1216 Asphalt Paving...... 32 1216-1-3 32 1313 Concrete Paving...... 32 1313-1-5 32 1713 Parking Bumpers...... 32 1713-1 32 1723.13 Painted Pavement Markings...... 32 1723.13-1-3 32 3223 Segmental Retaining Wall ...... 32 3223-1-7 32 9219 Seeding...... 32 9219-1-3 32 9223 Sodding...... 32 9223-1-3 32 9300 Plants...... 32 9300-1-5
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
33 1116 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping...... 33 1116-1-3 33 1300 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution...... 33 1300-1-2 33 3111 Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping...... 33 3111-1-2 33 4111 Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping...... 33 4111-1-3
APPENDIX A
UL Assembly Designs
End Table of Contents
April 2011 4 of 4 Wallace Place Apartments 00 1113 10-9050 BID SOLICITATION
SECTION 00 1113 - BID SOLICITATION FROM: 1.01 The Owner (hereinafter referred to as Owner): A. Wallace Place Apartments, NFP B. 4060 McFarland Road C. Rockford, IL, 61111 1.02 And the Architect (hereinafter referred to as Architect): A. Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. B. 4000 Morsay Drive C. Rockford, IL, 61107 D. www.tysonandbilly.com 1.03 DATE: April 15, 2011 1.04 TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS A. Your firm is invited to submit an offer under seal to Owner care of Tyson and Billy Architects for construction of a 1 Story - 9 unit apartment building located at 6160 Commonwealth Dr, Loves Park, IL before 3:00 pm local standard time on the 24th day of May, 2011. B. Bid Documents may be viewed online at the Architects website: www.tysonandbilly.com, under the Bidders List link. C. Bidding General Contractors may obtain access to a printable copy of the bid documents by contacting Lori Hoke or Brice List to register to bid. Once the bidding General Contactor is registered to bid, he will be given a username and password to log on to the "View Project" section of the Architects website and download the contract documents. D. Hard Copy Bid Documents for a Stipulated Sum contract may be obtained from the office of Tyson and Billy Architects located at 4000 Morsay Dr. Rockford, IL 61107 upon receipt of a refundable deposit, by cash, in the amount of $50 for one set. Bidders will be limited to one set. Deposits will be refunded upon return of the bidding documents in good condition without markings, notations, or other defacing, within (7) days after bid opening. Contractors that do not submit a bid will not be refunded their deposit. Checks should be made payable to Tyson and Billy Architects, PC. If it is desired for bid documents to be shipped to bidder, a separate non-refundable check shall be made payable to Tyson and Billy Architects, PC. in the amount of $25 or a valid UPS or FedEx account number. E. Refer to other bidding requirements described in Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 3100 - Available Project Information. F. Submit your offer on the Bid Form provided. Bidders may supplement this form as appropriate. G. Your offer will be required to be submitted under a condition of irrevocability for a period of 300 (Three hundred) days after submission. H. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. END OF BID SOLICITATION
April 2011 00 1113 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 00 2113 10-9050 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00 2113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUMMARY 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Invitation 1. Bid Submission 2. Intent 3. Contract Time B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents Identification 3. Availability 4. Examination 5. Inquiries/Addenda 6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions C. Site Assessment 1. Site Examination D. Bid Submission 1. Bid Ineligibility 2. Submission Procedure E. Bid Enclosures/Requirements 1. Security Deposit 2. HUD Form 2328 F. Offer Acceptance/Rejection 1. Duration of Offer 2. Acceptance of Offer 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Document 00 1113 - Advertisement for Bids. B. Document 00 3100 - Available Project Information. C. Document 00 4100 - Bid Form. D. HUD Form 2328 - Contractor's or Mortgagor's Cost Breakdown E. HUD Form 2554 - Supplementary conditions of the contract for consturction F. Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions: 1. Contract Time identification. 2. Tax exempt procedures. 3. Bond types and values. INVITATION 2.01 BID SUBMISSION A. Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Architect at 4000 Morsay Drive, Rockford, IL before 3:00 p.m. local standard time on the 24th day of May, 2011. B. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened. C. Offers will be opened privately immediately after the time for receipt of bids. 2.02 INTENT A. The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete a 1 story, wood framed, 9 unit apartment building located at 6160 Commonwealth Dr, Loves Park, IL for a Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.03 CONTRACT TIME
April 2011 00 2113 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 00 2113 10-9050 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. Perform the Work within the time stated in Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. B. The bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts the Contract Time period stated for performing the Work. The completion date in the Agreement shall be the Contract Time added to the commencement date. BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Invitation To Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Supplements To Bid Forms and Appendices identified. B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal. D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. 3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 071-HD169/IL06-Q091-011, as prepared by Architect, and with contents as identified in the Project Manual. 3.03 AVAILABILITY A. Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Architect. B. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Bid Documents may be viewed at the office of Architect. B. Bid Documents may be viewed at the Architect's website (www.tysonandbilly.com) under the Bidders List link. C. Bid Documents are on display at the offices of the following construction plan rooms: 1. Dodge Reports/1333 Burr Ridge Pkwy Suite 100/Burr Ridge, IL 60527/(630) 321-3711. 2. Northern IL Building Contractors Assoc. (NIBCA)/1111 S. Alpine Road/ Rockford, IL 61108/(815) 229-5636. D. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the documents be incomplete. E. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. 3.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to Brice List, telephone 815-229-8222 or email [email protected]. B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known recipients. 3.06 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10 days before receipt of bids. B. When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will issue an Addendum to known bidders. C. The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products. D. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each proposed substitution.
April 2011 00 2113 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 00 2113 10-9050 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
E. Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted. F. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for additional requirements. SITE ASSESSMENT 4.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid. BID SUBMISSION 5.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. B. Submit two copies of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project number and Owner's name on the outside. 5.02 BID INELIGIBILITY A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be declared unacceptable. B. Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of Owner, be declared unacceptable. C. Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of Owner, invalidate the bid. D. Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be returned. BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS 6.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT A. Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit as follows: 1. Bid Bond of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Amount on AIA A310 Bid Bond Form. B. Endorse the Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the principal (Contractor) and surety. C. The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder. D. Include the cost of bid security in the Bid Amount. E. After a bid has been accepted, all securities will be returned to the respective bidders. F. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned. 6.02 BID REQUIREMENTS A. All bidders seeking to do business with the owner are required to submit with any bid the following documents: 1. Bid form with addenda acknowledged - (1) original and (1) copy. 2. Bid security deposit. 3. (1) copy completed HUD form 2328. 6.03 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices. B. Taxes: Refer to Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions for tax exemption. 6.04 BID FORM SIGNATURE A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows: 1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal.
April 2011 00 2113 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 00 2113 10-9050 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. 3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. 4. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a Partnership. OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION 7.01 DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of 300 (Three hundred) days after the bid closing date. 7.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. B. After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a written Bid Acceptance. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
April 2011 00 2113 - 4 BID FORM
BID FOR: Wallace Place Apartments 9 Unit Apartments Loves Park, IL
Architect Project # 10-9050
The undersigned, having familiarized themselves with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work, and with the Specifications (including Instruction to Bidders, this bid, the Non-Conclusive Affidavit, the Form of Labor and Material Payment Bond, the General Conditions, the Special Conditions, the General Scope of Work, the Technical Specification and the Drawings) and acknowledge receipt of Addenda No. ______through ______, (if any thereto), as prepared by Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. and on file in the office of Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C., 4000 Morsay Dr., Rockford, Illinois 61107 hereby proposes to:
1. Furnish all bonds and insurance required by the Bidding Documents.
2. Accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract.
3. Complete all work, as shown and specified herein, within three hundred sixty (360) consecutive calendar days from the date of the HUD Closing.
Base Bid:
The bidder agrees to perform all work called for, and/or specified, and described within Contract Documents, exclusive of Alternate bids, for the sum of:
$______Dollars ($______)
In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the owner. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the understood within 300 calendar days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver a contract in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond within ten (10) days after the contract is presented to him for signature.
Bid Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ),
in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the Specifications.
Attached hereto is an affidavit in proof that the undersigned has not entered into any collusion with any person in respect to this proposal or any other proposal or submitting of proposals for the contract for which this proposal is submitted.
The bidder represents that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, participated in a previous contract or sub-contract subject to the Equal Opportunity clause prescribed by Executive Orders 10925, 11114, or 11246, or the Secretary of Labor; that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, filed all required compliance reports; and that representations indicating submission or required compliance reports, signed by proposed sub- contractors, will be obtained prior to sub-contract awards. (The above representation need not be submitted in connection with the contracts or sub-contracts which are exempt from the clause).
Certification of Non-segregated Facilities. By signing this bid, the bidder certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees, any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he
April 2011 Page 1
does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that breach of this certification is in violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms, and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms, and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are, in fact, segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin, because of habit, local custom or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed sub-contractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed sub-contractors prior to the award of sub-contractors, exceeding $10,000.00, which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he will forward a notice to his proposed sub-contractors as provided in the instructions to bidders.
NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.
DATE: (Name of Bidding Entity)
Official Address: BY:
______TITLE:
______(SIGN ORIGINAL ONLY)
______
April 2011 Page 2
Wallace Place Apartments 10-9050 BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we the undersigned,
as PRINCIPAL, and (Name of Principal)
as SURETY are held (Name of Surety) and firmly bound unto the Owner the penal sum of:
Dollars ($ ), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid, dated , 20 , for
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified therein after the opening of the same, or, if no period be specified, within sixty (60) days after the said opening, and shall within the period specified therefore, or, if no period be specified within the (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with the Owner in accordance with the bid as accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such contract; or in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the failure to enter into such contract and give such bond within the time specified, if the Principal shall pay the Owner the difference between the amount specified and said bid and the amount for which the Owner may procure the required work or supplies or both, if the latter amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this day of , 20 , the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.
In presence of:
(SEAL) (Individual Principal)
(Business Address)
(SEAL) (Individual Principal)
(Business Address) Attest:
April 2011 Bid Bond - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 10-9050
(Corporate Principal)
(Business Address)
By (SEAL)
Attest:
(Corporate Surety)
(Address)
By (SEAL)
(Power-of-attorney for person signing for surety company must be attached to bond)
April 2011 Bid Bond - 2
Contractor's and/or Mortgagor's U.S. Department of Housing and OMB No. 2502-0044 (exp. 12/31/2009) Urban Development Cost Breakdown Office of Housing Schedules of Values Federal Housing Commissioner Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 4 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This information is required to obtain benefits. HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB Control Number.
Section 227 of the National Housing Act (Section 126 of the Housing Act of 1954, Public Law 560, 12 U.S.C., 1715r), authorizes the collection of this information. The information is required for a general contractor when an identity of interest exists between the general contractor and the mortgagor or when the mortgagor is a non- profit entity and a cost plus contract has been used. The information is used by HUD to facilitate the advances of mortgage proceeds and their monitoring.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal Regulations. While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information request.
Date Sponsor
Project No. Building Identification
Name of Project Location
This form represents the Contractors and/or Mortgagors firm costs and services as a basis for disbursing dollar amounts when insured advances are requested. Detailed instructions for completing this form are included on the reverse side.
Line Div. Trade Item Cost Trade Description 1 3 Concrete 2 4 Masonry 3 5 Metals 4 6 Rough Carpentry 5 6 Finish Carpentry 6 7 Waterproofing 7 7 Insulation 8 7 Roofing 9 7 Sheet Metal 10 8 Doors 11 8 Windows 12 8 Glass 13 9 Lath and Plaster 14 9 Drywall 15 9 Tile Work 16 9 Acoustical 17 9 Wood Flooring 18 9 Resilient Flooring 19 9 Painting and Decorating 20 10 Specialties 21 11 Special Equipment 22 11 Cabinets 23 11 Appliances 24 12 Blinds and Shades, Artwork 25 12 Carpets 26 13 Special Construction 27 14 Elevators 28 15 Plumbing and Hot Water 29 15 Heat and Ventilation 30 15 Air Conditioning 31 16 Electrical 32 Subtotal (Structures) 33 Accessory Structures 34 Total (Lines 32 and 33) form HUD-2328 (5/95) Previous edition is obsolete Page 1 of 3 ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Line Div. Trade Item Cost Trade Description 35 2 Earth Work 36 2 Site Utilities 37 2 Roads and Walks 38 2 Site Improvements 39 2 Lawns and Planting Nonresidential and Special 40 2 Unusual Site Condition Exterior Land Improvement Offsite Costs 41 Total Land Improvements (costs included in trade item breakdown) (costs not included in trade item breakdown) 42 Total Struct. & Land Imprvts. Description Est. Cost Description Est. Cost 43 1 General Requirements 44 Subtotal (Lines 42 and 43) 45 Builder's Overhead 46 Builder's Profit Total $ 47 Subtotal (Lines 44 thru 46) Other Fees Total $ 48 Demolition (costs not included in trade item breakdown) 49 Other Fees 50 Bond Premium Description Est. Cost 51 Total for All Improvements 52 Builder's Profit Paid by Means Other Than Cash 53 Total for All Improvements Less Line 52 Total $ Total $ I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true and accurate. Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802) Mortgagor By Date
Contractor By Date
FHA (Processing Analyst) Date FHA (Chief, Cost Branch or Cost Analyst) Date
FHA (Chief Underwriter) Date
Instructions for Completing Form HUD-2328 This form is prepared by the contractor and/or mortgagor as a requirement for the issuance of a firm commitment. The firm replacement cost of the project also serves as a basis for the disbursement of dollar amounts when insured advances are requested. A detailed breakdown of trade items is provided along with spaces to enter dollar amounts and trade descriptions. A separate form is prepared through line 32 for each structure type. A summation of these structure costs are entered on line 32 of a master form. Land improvements, General Requirements and Fees are completed through line 53 on the master 2328 only.
Date—Date form was prepared. Unusual Site Conditions—This trade item reflects rock excavation, Sponsor—Name of sponsor or sponsoring organization. high water table, excessive cut and fill, retaining walls, erosion, poor drainage and other on-site conditions considered unusual. Project No.—Eight-digit assigned project number. Cost—Enter the cost being submitted by the Contractor or bids Building Identification—Number(s) or Letter(s) of each building as submitted by a qualified subcontractor for each trade item. These designated on plans. costs will include, as a minimum, prevailing wage rates as determined Name of Project—Sponsors designated name of project. by the Secretary of Labor. Location—Street address, city and state. Trade Description—Enter a brief description of the work included in Division—Division numbers and trade items have been developed each trade item. from the cost accounting section of the uniform system. Other Fees—Includable are fees to be paid by the Contractor, such as Accessory Structures—This item reflects structures, such as: com- sewer tap fees not included in the plumbing contract. Fees paid or to munity, storage, maintenance, mechanical, laundry and project office be paid by the Mortgagor are not to be included on this form. buildings. Also included are garages and carports or other buildings. Total For All Improvements—This is the sum of lines 1 through 50 When the amount shown on line 33 is $20,000.00 or 2% of line 32 and is to include the total builder's profit (line 46). whichever is the lesser, a separate form HUD-2328 will be prepared through line 32 for Accessory Structures.
form HUD-2328 (5/95) Previous edition is obsolete Page 2 of 3 ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Line 52—When applicable, enter that portion of the builder's profit Off-Site Costs—Enter description and dollar amount including fees (line 46) to be paid by means other than cash and/or any part of the and bond premium for off-site improvements. builder's profit to be waived during construction. Demolition—Enter description and dollar amount of demolition work Non-Residential and Special Exterior Land Improvement Costs— necessary to condition site for building improvements including the Describe and enter the cost of each improvement, i.e. on-site parking removal of existing structures, foundations, utilities, etc. facilities including individual garages and carports, commercial facili- Other Fees—Enter a brief description of item involved and cost ties, swimming pools with related facilities and on-site features pro- estimate for each item. vided to enhance the environment and livability of the project and the Signatures—Enter the firm name, signature of authorized officer of neighborhood. The Design Representative and Cost Analyst shall the contractor and/or mortgagor and date the form was completed. collaborate with the mortgagor or his representative in designating the items to be included.
form HUD-2328 (5/95) Previous edition is obsolete Page 3 of 3 ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Wallace Place Apartments 00 3100 10-9050 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
SECTION 00 3100 - AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS 4.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is included with this document: 1. Title: "Geotechnical Engineering Report, Milestone 9-unit Apartment, 6160 Commonwealth Dr. Loves Park, IL". 2. Date: January 14, 2011 3. Prepared by: Testing Services Corporation 4. Project Number: L - 76,323 B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations. C. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Each Bidder is cautioned that it is his responsibility to examine the logs of the borings and the site and to produce additional information if neccessary. END OF SECTION
April 2011 00 3100 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 00 5000 10-9050 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 00 5000 - CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The Agreement is based on HUD 92442-CA Construction Contract Lump Sum B. The General Conditions are based on AIA A201 and Form HUD 2554 Supplementary Conditions of the contract for construction. The provision of the contract and HUD 2554 take precedence over all inconsistent provisions in the AIA A201.. 1.02 FORMS A. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Bond Forms: 1. Performance and Payment Bond Form: AIA A312. C. Post-Award Certificates and Other Forms: 1. Schedule of Values Form: Contractor's and Mortgagor's Cost Breakdown - HUD 92328. 2. Application for Payment Form: AIA G702 and G703. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AIA A201 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; . B. AIA A312 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond. C. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment. D. AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
April 2011 00 5000 - 1
U.S. Department of Housing OMB Approval No. 2502-0011 Capital Advance Program and Urban Development (exp. 8/31/2013) Construction Contract Office of Housing Lump Sum Federal Housing Commissioner For use under Section 202 of the Housing Act of 1959 or Section 811 of the National Affordable Housing Act) Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 16 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including This information collection suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Reports Management Officer, Paperwork Reduction Project (2502-0011), U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 451 7th Street, SW, Washington, DC 20410-3600. The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by provisions set forth in Article 1.E of the National Housing Act (Public Law 479, 48 Stat. 1246, 12 U.S.C., 1701 et. seq.). It is provided by contractors and mortgagors to obtain approval from the FHA Commissioner’s approval for any changes in the terms of the Contract Document, or order for extra work, or changes by altering or adding to the work, or which will change the design concept of the Construction Contract. This information is used by HUD to ensure that viable projects are being developed. Furnishing this information is mandatory, and failure to provide it may result in your not receiving your benefits. The information is considered non-sensitive, and no assurance of confidentiality is provided. Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal Regulations. While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information project. This agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that collection displays a valid OMB control number.
This Agreement, made the ______day of ______20____, between ______
______(hereinafter called the “Contractor”) and
______(hereinafter called the “Owner”).
Witnesseth, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration hereinafter set out, agree as follows: Article 1 – Scope of Contract Contractor's Surety or Guarantor have been placed on file with the A. The Contract between the parties is set forth in the “Contract Department of Housing and Urban Development (“HUD”), and shall Documents” which consists of this Agreement, the Drawings and govern in all matters which arise with respect to such Drawings and Specifications, together with any addenda thereto, the current Specifications. edition of AIA Document A201, “General Conditions of the Contract E. Changes in the Drawings and Specifications or any terms of the for Construction,” except all paragraphs concerning arbitration, and Contract Documents, or orders for extra work, or changes by altering Form HUD 2554, “Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for or adding to the work, or which will change the design concept, may Construction.” The provisions of this instrument and the said HUD be affected only with the prior written approval of HUD under such Supplementary Conditions take precedience over all inconsistent conditions as HUD may establish. provisions in the said AIA General Conditions. This Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the parties, and any Article 2 – Time previously existing contract concerning the work contemplated by A. The work to be performed under this Contract shall be the Contract Documents is hereby revoked. commenced within ______days of this Agreement, and shall be B. The Contractor shall furnish all of the materials and perform all completed by ______, 20___. The time by which the of the work (within the property lines) shown on, and in accordance work shall be completed may be extended in accordance with the with, the Drawings and Specifications entitled terms of the said AIA General Conditions only with the prior written ______approval of HUD. ______, B. The Contractor shall correct any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship which appear within one year from the date of final HUD Project No.______, dated completion. ______. C. If the work is not brought to final completion in accordance with C. The Drawings, which are numbered ______, the Drawings and Specifications, including any authorized changes, and the Specifications, the pages of which are by the date specified above, or by such date to which the contract numbered______, time may be extended, the sum stated in Article 3A below shall be reduced by the actual cost of taxes and insurance, as approved by and addenda numbered ______, HUD, for the period from the scheduled date of completion through have been prepared by ______, (“Design the date construction was actually completed, shall be determined. Architect”). This cost shall be reduced by an amount equal to the project’s net operating income (as determined by HUD) for the period upon which The Architect administering the Construction Contract (hereinafter, the aforementioned actual costs are based. and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, referred to as the “Architect”) is ______D. The Owner and Contractor may amend this contract prior to initial endorsement, in a form prescribed by the Commissioner, to ______. provide for an incentive payment to the Contractor, which will result D. A master set of said Drawings and Specifications, identified by in an increase in the contract sum stated in Article 3A below, if the the parties hereto and by the Design Architect, the Architect, and the work is completed before the date specified in this contract. The Contractor will not be entitled to any incentive payment resulting
Previous editions are obsolete Page 1 of 3 form HUD-92442-CA (11/00) ref. Handbooks 4571.4 & 4571.5 from early completion if HUD determines that the Contractor’s cost other permits, licenses, tools, equipment and temporary structures certification, if required by Article 7, is fraudulent or materially necessary for the construction of the project. The Contractor shall misrepresents the Contractor’s actual cost of construction. give all required notices and shall comply with all applicable codes, E. The date of final completion shall be the date the HUD laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and protective covenants, representative signs the final HUD Representative’s Trip Report and with the current regulations of the National Board of Fire provided that the trip report is subsequently endorsed by the Chief Underwriters, wherever applicable. The Contractor further shall Architect. comply with the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. The Contractor shall immediately notify HUD of the delivery Article 3 – Contract Sum and Payments of all permits, licenses, certificates of inspection, certificates of occupancy, and any other such certificates and instruments required A. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the by law, regardless of to whom issued, and shall cause them to be Contract, as hereinafter provided, the sum of $ ______displayed to HUD upon request. . B. If the Contractor observes that the Drawings and Specifications B. Each month after the commencement of work hereunder, the are at variance with any applicable codes, laws, ordinances, rules or Contractor shall make a monthly request on Form HUD 92448 for regulations, or protective covenants, it shall promptly notify the payment by the Owner for work done during the preceding month. Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as Each request for payment shall be filed at least ______days provided in this Contract for changes in the Drawings and before the date payment is desired. Subject to the approval of HUD, Specifications. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be the Contractor shall be entitled to payment thereon in an amount contrary to such codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, or equal to (1) the total value of classes of the work acceptably protective covenants, without giving such notice to the Architect, it complete; plus (2) the value of materials and equipment not shall bear all cost arising therefrom. incorporated in the work, but delivered to and suitably stored at the site; plus (3) the value of components stored off-site in compliance C. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall furnish to with applicable HUD requirements less (4) 10 percent holdback and the Owner a survey showing the location on the site of all less prior payments. The “values” of (1), (2) and (3) shall be improvements constructed thereon, and showing the location of all computed in accordance with the amounts assigned to classes of the water, sewer, gas and electric lines and mains, and of all existing work in the “Contractor's and/or Mortgager's Cost Breakdown,” utility easements. Such survey shall be prepared by a licensed attached hereto as Exhibit “A”. The Contractor agrees that no surveyor who shall certify that the work is installed and erected materials or equipment required by the Specifications will be entirely upon the land covered by the mortgage and within any purchased under a conditional sale contract or with the use of any building restriction lines on said land, and does not overhang or security agreement or the vendor's title or lien retention instrument. otherwise encroach upon any easement or right-of-way of others. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish additional surveys when C. The balance due the Contractor hereunder shall be payable required by the Owner for any improvements, including structures upon the expiration of 30 days after the work hereunder is fully and utilities, not theretofore located on a survey. The Contractor shall complete, provided the following have occurred: furnish copies of such survey required hereunder for HUD. (1) All work hereunder requiring inspection by municipal or D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the other governmental authorities having jurisdiction has been maintenance of all landscaping which may be required by the inspected and approved by such authorities and by the rating or Drawings and Specifications until such time as both parties to this inspection organization, bureau, association or office having Contract shall receive written notice from HUD that such landscaping jurisdiction; has been finally completed. The Owner hereby agrees to make (2) All certificates of occupancy, or other approvals, with available to the Contractor, for such purpose, without cost to the respect to all units of the project have been issued by State or local latter, such facilities as water, hose and sprinkler. governmental authorities having jurisdiction; and Article 6 – Assurance of Completion (3) Permission(s) To Occupy (Form HUD-92485) for all units of The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner assurance of completion the project have been issued by HUD. of the work in the form of (specify) ______D. With its final application for payment by the Owner, the ______Contractor shall disclose, on a form prescribed by HUD, all unpaid obligations contracted in connection with the work performed under this Contract. The Contractor agrees that, within 15 days following ______receipt of final payment, it will pay such obligations in cash and furnish satisfactory evidence of such payment to the Owner. ______Article 4 – Receipts and Releases of Liens ______The Owner may require the Contractor to attach to each request for ______payment its acknowledgement of payment and all subcontractors' ______and material supplier's acknowledgements of payment for work done and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished through the date ______covered by the previous payment. Concurrently with the final ______payment, the Owner may require the Contractor to obtain similar waivers or releases from all subcontractors and material suppliers. ______. Article 5 – Requirements of Contractor Such assurance of completion shall run to the Owner and HUD as obligees. A. The Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all building and
Previous editions are obsolete Page 2 of 3 form HUD-92442-CA (11/00) ref. Handbooks 4571.4 & 4571.5 Article 7 – Cost Certification Article 9 – Assignments, Subcontracts and Termination An identity of interest between the Owner and the Contractor is A. This Contract shall not be assignable by either party without prohibited. In the event HUD determines that there is an identity of prior written consent of the other party and HUD, except that the interest between the Owner and the Contractor, the Contractor shall Owner may assign the Contract, or any rights hereunder, to HUD. certify on a form prescribed by HUD, its cost incurred in the performance of work under this Contract. B. The Contractor shall not subcontract all of the work to be performed hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner Article 8 – Right of Entry and Interpretation and HUD. A. HUD, its agents or assigns, at all times during construction, has C. Upon request by the Owner, or HUD, the Contractor shall the right of entry and free access to the project and the right to inspect disclose the names of all persons with whom it has contracted or will all work done and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished, contract with respect to work to be done and materials and installed or stored in and about the project. For such purpose, the equipment to be furnished hereunder. Contractor shall furnish such enclosed working space as HUD may D. The Contractor understands that the work under this contract is require and find acceptable as to location, size, accommodations to be financed by a capital advance to be secured by a mortgage and and furnishings. subject to the terms of a Capital Advance Agreement between the B. HUD shall also have the right to interpret the Contract Owner and HUD. Documents and to determine compliance therewith. The Contractor further understands that said Capital Advance Agreement provides that in the event of the failure of the Owner to perform its obligations to HUD thereunder, HUD may, as attorney-in- fact for the Owner, undertake the completion of the project in accordance with this Contract. In the event HUD elects not to undertake such completion, the Contractor's obligations under this Contract shall terminate.
In Witness Whereof, the parties to these presents have executed this contract in six (6) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first above mentioned. (Seal) Attest: Owner
Witness By
Witness Title
(Seal) Contractor
Witness By
Witness Title
Note: If Contractor or Owner is a corporation, Secretary should attest.
Previous editions are obsolete Page 3 of 3 form HUD-92442-CA (11/00) ref. Handbooks 4571.4 & 4571.5
Supplementary Conditions of U.S. Department of Housing OMB Approval No. 2502-0470 and Urban Development (Expires 5/31/2010) the Contract for Construction Office of Housing Federal Housing Commissioner Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 30 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This informa- tion is required to obtain benefits and voluntary. HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
This information collection is necessary to ensure that viable projects are developed. It is important to obtain information from applicants to assist HUD in determining if nonprofit organizations initially funded continue to have the financial and administrative capacity needed to develop a project and that the project design meets the needs of the residents. The Department will use this information to sets forth the obligations of the contractor or subcontractor performing under the covered contract. This information is required in order to obtain benefits. This information is considered non- sensitive and no assurance of confidentiality is provided.
Article 1 – Labor Standards requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and Instructions (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the Whenever only FHA mortgage insurance is involved, use paragraph construction industry; and (A) and (C) of Article 1 – Labor Standards. Whenever any direct form (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide of assistance (Section 8, Section 202/811 Capital Advance, grants fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the etc.) is involved, use paragraphs (A) and (B) and (C) of Article 1 – wage rates contained in the wage determination. Labor Standards. (b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to Applicability be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate this contract pertains is being assisted or insured by the United (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropri- States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provi- ate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee sions are included in this Contract or related instrument pursuant to the to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment provisions applicable to such Federal assistance or insurance. Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, A. 1. (i) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will construction or development of the project), will be paid uncondition- notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional ally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.) as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor (c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechan- under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages ics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. The and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determi- reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section nation within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Manage- to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions ment and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.) made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less (d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs A.1.(ii)(b) or (c) the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the or incurred during such weekly period. classification under this contract from the first day on which work is Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage performed in the classification. rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classifica- (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the tion of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics perform- which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either ing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or The wage determination (including any additional classification and other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis- of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require (ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.) determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following 2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action criteria have been met: or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the (1) The work to be performed by the classification contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005) Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete. Page 1 of 4 ref. Handbook 4571.1 same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the con- subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held tract during the payroll period has been paid the full by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages than permissable deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or 3; mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper, employed or (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or or cash equivalents for the classification of work per- development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the formed, as specified in the applicable wage determina- contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the tion incorporated into the contract. contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be (c) necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, ad- The weekly submission of a properly executed vance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of such amounts withheld for and on account of the contractor or Compliance” required by paragraph A.3.(ii)(b) of this section. subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The (d) The falsification of any of the above certifications Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts. prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 3. (i) Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic records 31 of the United States Code. relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all required under paragraph A.3.(i) of this section available for inspec- laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the tion, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall representatives to interview employees during working hours on the contain the name, address, and social security number of each such job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably 29 CFR Part 5.12. anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in 4. (i) Apprentices and Trainees. Apprentices. Apprentices Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program regis- the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers tered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employ- State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a ing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and budget under Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for proba- OMB Control Numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.) tionary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of appren- (ii) (a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in tices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmis- employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable sion to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work accurately and completely all of the information required to be actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a con- Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Gov- tractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than ernment Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime con- that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates tractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) speci- subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget fied in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be under OMB Control Number 1215-0149.) observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate (b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of “Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontrac- progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate tor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the appren- ticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe information required to be maintained under 29 CFR benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classifi- Part 5.5(a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and cation. If the Administrator determines that a different practice complete; prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005) Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete. Page 2 of 4 ref. Handbook 4571.1 of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize appren- HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR tices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work Part 24. performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to individually registered in a program which has received prior ap- 24 CFR Part 24. proval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of train- the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal ees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U.S.C., “Federal Housing Administra- under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Adminis- tion transactions”, provides in part: “Whoever, for the purpose of . . tration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified . influencing in any way the action of such Administration . . . makes, in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, ex- utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false . . pressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in . shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe years, or both.” benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall As used in be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determi- this paragraph, the terms “laborers” and “mechanics” include watch- nation unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division men and guards. determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with 1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program 2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages, liquidated damages. In shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) determination for the work actually performed. In the event the of this paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or performed until an acceptable program is approved. a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated dam- (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of ages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which 5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The con- such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the tractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime incorporated by reference in this contract. wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. 6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in 3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may be HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcon- or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of tracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contrac- clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5. tor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same 7. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in in 29 CFR 5.12. subparagraph (2) of this paragraph. 8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Require- 4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in ments. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein (4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors incorporated by reference in this contract. to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime 9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subpara- subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes graphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph. shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Depart- C. The Contractor will be required to execute FHA Form No. 2403- ment of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within A, Contractor's Prevailing Wage Certificate, as a condition prece- the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor dent to insurance by the Federal Housing Administration of that (or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U.S. certain mortgage loan, or an advance thereof, made or to be made Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. by the mortgagee in connection with the construction of the project. 10. (i) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract Article 2 – Equal Employment Opportunity the contractor certifies neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm The applicant hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005) Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete. Page 3 of 4 ref. Handbook 4571.1 incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification Provided, That if the applicant so participating is a State or local thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41 government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to CFR Chapter 60, which is paid for in whole or in part with funds any agency, instrumentality or subdivision of such government obtained from the Federal Government or borrowed on the credit of which does not participate in work on or under the contract. the Federal Government pursuant to a grant, contract, loan insur- I. The applicant agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with ance, or guarantee, or undertaken pursuant to any Federal program the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the involving such grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee, the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal oppor- following equal opportunity clause: tunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering agency and follows: the Secretary of Labor such information as they may require for the A. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise assist the applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure responsibility for securing compliance. that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during J. The applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the 11246 of September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruit- who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and ment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive other forms of compensation; and selection for training including order and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be and subcontractors by the administering agency or the Secretary of provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of the Executive order. In B. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor state that all these undertakings, the administering agency may take any or all of qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment with- the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in out regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee); refrain from extending any further assistance to the applicant under the program C. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other assurance of future compliance has been received from such appli- contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the said cant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate labor union or workers representatives of the Contractor's commit- legal proceedings. ments hereunder, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. Article 3 – Equal Opportunity for Businesses and Lower D. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order Income Persons Located Within the Project Area 11246 of September 24, 1965 and of the rules, regulations, and (Applicable to Section 236 projects, where the estimated replace- relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. ment cost of the project as determined by the Secretary of Housing E. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by and Urban Development exceeds $500,000, and to all projects, Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, including Section 236 regardless of estimated replacement cost, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant receiving rent supplement assistance under Title I, Section 101 of the thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965.) the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain A. The work to be performed under this contract is on a project compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assis- F. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondis- tance from the Department of Housing and Urban Development and crimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3 suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared requires that to the greatest extent feasible opportunities for training ineligible for further government contracts or federally assisted and employment be given lower income residents of the unit of local construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other determined by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development in sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in which the projects located and contracts for work in connection with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. owned in substantial part by persons residing in the same metropoli- G. The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immedi- tan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project. ately preceding paragraph A and the provisions of paragraphs A Article 4 – Health and Safety through G in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted A. No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundingss by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontrac- safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor tor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any by regulation. subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means B. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompli- Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 (formerly part 1518) ance. Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes and failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91- vendor as a result of such direction by the Secretary of Housing and 54, 83 Stat. 96). Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor, the Contractor may C. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in every request the United States to ener into such litigation to protect the subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcon- interests of the United States. tractor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any H. The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development of equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment prac- the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such tices when it participates in federally assisted construction work: provisions. form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005) Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete. Page 4 of 4 ref. Handbook 4571.1 Wallace Place Apartments 00 7300 10-9050 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION 00 7300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1.02 These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. 1.03 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements. B. Section 01 4216 - Definitions. 1.05 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 2 - MODIFICATIONS TO AIA A201 2.01 ARTICLE 3.6 - TAXES A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 3.6.2: This project is of tax exempt status, proof of same shall be furnished to the contractor upon request. 2.02 ARTICLE 8 - TIME A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 8.1.5: Contract Time commences at the time of Notice To Proceed and continues for Three Hundred Sixty (360) consecutive calander days. 2.03 ARTICLE 11.5 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 11.5.3: The bond value requirements are as follows: a. Provide bonds on AIA A312. b. Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond. c. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond. d. Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract. PART 3 - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS 3.01 Insurance Coverage A. The Contractor shall carry the necessary insurance coverage as specified: 1. Workers Compensation a. Statutory Limits b. $1,000,000 Each Accident 2. Employer's Liability a. $100,000 (Coverage B) 3. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance Bodily Injury a. $1,000,000 Each Person b. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence c. $1,000,000 Aggregate 4. Property Damage a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence b. $1,000,000 Aggregate, or 5. Excess (Umbrella) a. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit 6. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance Bodily Injury a. $300,000 Each Person b. $500,000 Each Accident
April 2011 00 7300 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 00 7300 10-9050 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
c. $500,000 Aggregate 7. Property Damage a. $100,000 Each Accident, or, b. $500,000 Combined Single Limit B. This insurance must include non-owned, hired and rented vehicles, as well as owned vehicles. C. The Contractor must submit Certificates of Insurance for himself and any subcontractor before work begins. D. Manufacturer's and contractor's public liability with bodily injury and property damage limits of not less than $1,000,000.00 for each event to protect the contractor and each subcontractor against claims of personal injury or death and damage to the property of others. The Owner, HUD, and the Architect shall also be named as additionally insured on this liability coverage. This shall cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles on the site or sites. 3.02 List of Subcontractors A. Prime Contractors shall list subcontractors who will perform any portion of the work as requested. Contractor shall furnish partial waiver of liens starting with first payout request from subcontractors and suppliers with full waiver of liens being submitted prior to final payment. 3.03 Guarantees A. Contractors shall guarantee all materials and workmanship to be free of defects for a period of one year from date of acceptance of said work by the owner and shall replace at his own expense, any work that may be found defective within said one year period. Also deliver all Manufacturers Warranties for installed items with warranties in excess of the above as offered by Manufacturer or specified in other sections. 3.04 Responsibility of Contractor A. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents and Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, tools, equipment, levies, fees or other expenses and all other services and facilities of every nature what whatsoever necessary for the performance of the contract and to deliver all improvements embraced in this Contract for Construction complete in every respect within the specified time. 3.05 Contract Documents and Drawings A. Contractor shall be furnished without charge Contract Documents, including Technical Specifications and Drawings, as follows: General Contractor - ten (10) sets. Additional copies requested by the Contractor will be furnished at cost or one (1) set of reproducible will be furnished to the Contractor at cost. 3.06 Record Retention A. Federal Regulation CFR 24, Section 85.36 that requires all Contractors and Subcontractors who work on any project to maintain all accounting records related to a project for a minimum of three (3) years after final payout for the contract apply to this contract. 3.07 Conflict of Directions A. Where specifications appear to be at variance with the laws, ordinances or regulations, the Contractor shall secure an interpretation from the owner or its representative prior to submitting bids. Failure to comply with the above request will result in the Contractor bearing expense of correction of work to conform with all legal requirements. 3.08 Clean-up A. Contractor will clean-up at the end of each working day. This clean-up will include the removal of all materials that are scheduled for disposal, restoration of walls and floors to original condition. Dust collecting devices shall be used on all boring, shaping and sanding equipment. 3.09 Hazardous Materials A. Building materials known to be environmentally hazardous, or containing environmentally hazardous ingredients such as, but not limited to, Lead Mercury, Arsenic, Silver and Asbestos,
April 2011 00 7300 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 00 7300 10-9050 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
will not be purchased or used by contractors doing maintenance, construction, or rehabilitation of this project. 3.10 Utility Fees A. Construction contract to include all permit and hook-up fees imposed by utility companies, city, county, and state. contractor to verify fee amounts with the appropriate authority prior to bidding. 3.11 Sprinkler System A. NFPA 13 R Sprinkler system shall not be substituted for a complete NFPA 13 system due to the use of an area increase. 3.12 As-Built Survey A. Contractor to provide and pay for As-built survey meeting HUD requirements including showing all utility locations and providing a completed HUD Surveyor's Report #2457. B. Contractor to provide and pay for survey update at HUD Final Closing which can be 6-12 months after the date of substantial completion. 3.13 Retainage A. 10% shall be witheld from each progress payment until the date of substantial completion at which time the retainage may be dropped to 5% with consent of surety. 5% retainage will be retained until HUD Final Closing which may be 6-12 months from date of substantial completion. 3.14 Permit A. Contractor to pull permit through the City of Loves Park, IL with the assistance of the Architect.
DEFINITIONS 4.01 Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 4.02 Furnish or Supply: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage. 4.03 Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and ready for use. 4.04 Provide: To furnish or supply, plus install. 4.05 Project Manual: The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which includes the Bid Documents, Contract Documents, and Specifications. END OF DOCUMENT
April 2011 00 7300 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 01 1000 10-9050 SUMMARY
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project: 9 unit apartment building. B. Owner: Wallace Place Apartments, NFP C. Architect's Name: Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. D. The Project consists of the construction of the following structure:. 1. A one story, wood framed structure with concrete slab on grade. 2. Construction Type: Residential, R-2 Use Group, 5B Un-Protected construction classification. 3. Major Systems: Wood framed structure with gas fired through-wall heating and electric cooling unit in apartments and gas fired heating and central air in common areas, 100% sprinklered NFPA 13. General Contractor's responsibility to verify that the sprinkler subcontractor has bid accordingly. An NFPA 13R system will not be accepted due to area increase. 4. Performance requirements for completing work: 100% performance payment bond. 5. Construction contract shall include all permit and hook-up fees imposed by utility companies, city, county, and state. Contractor to verify fee amounts with the appropriate authority prior to bidding. 6. Project funding is provided by United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Chicago Area Office, Section 811. 7. This project is of Tax Exempt status, proof of same shall be furnished upon request. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in 00 5000 - Contracting Forms. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. B. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 1000 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 01 2000 10-9050 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Price and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Form to be used: AIA G702 and G703. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and insurance. F. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. G. Revise schedule at each pay request to show work in place under this application, total completed to date of application, percentage of completion, balance to finish and retainage. H. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. I. Submit 6 copies of each Application for Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Form to be used: HUD 92448 this form must exactly match HUD 2328 submitted at firm commitment. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit pencil copy of pay request document package to the following parties at least one week prior to the payout meeting in order to receive payment: 1. Architect at (815) 229-8218 or [email protected] 2. HUD Consultant 3. Owner 4. HUD Observer E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Submit 6 sets of pay request package plus 4 extra copies of HUD 92448, one photo copy of lien waivers, one copy of contractor's sworn statement at each Application for Payment meeting. G. The following shall constitute one pay request package: 1. HUD 92448 2. HUD 5372 3. AIA G702 and G703 H. Documentation will be distributed as follows at the meeting: 1. 1 Complete set of pay request documents to the owner. 2. 1 Complete set of pay request documents to the architect. 3. 1 Complete set of pay request documents to the contractor 4. 1 Complete set of pay request documents to the HUD Observer plus one contractor's sworn statement and a photocopy of all lien waivers.
April 2011 01 2000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 2000 10-9050 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
5. 2 complete sets of pay request documents to the HUD Consultant plus 4 extra HUD 92448 forms. I. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit the following paperwork to the title company immediately following the pay request meeting: 1. Contractor's sworn statement. 2. All original lien waivers. 3. HUD 92448. 4. HUD 5372. 5. AIA G702 and 703. 6. Some title companies may require additional paperwork or may not require all of the items listed above. It is the contractor's responsibility to get all necessary information to the title company. J. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. B. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. C. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. D. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Labor cost to indicate wage rates not less than minimum wage rates specified in contract documents. c. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. d. Allowed Overhead and profit. e. Justification for any change in Contract Time. f. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. g. Submittal to clearly state reason for change (ie. Owner Requested, Contractor requested, Job Condition necessary, Unforeseen Conditions, etc.) 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E. If the Architect accepts a request for a time extension a no cost change order will be produced. Contractor to provide backup data explaining delay as well as a consent of surety. F. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Contractor may not request payment for a change order until the change has been approved by HUD and the architect is satisfied that the work included in the change order is complete. Contractor must notify the architect that they are ready to bill for a change order at least one week prior to the pay application meeting. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
April 2011 01 2000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 2000 10-9050 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 2000 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 01 2100 10-9050 ALLOWANCES
SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. 1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less applicable taxes B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 2. Prepare Change Order. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.03 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE A. Section 04200- Unit Masonry: Include the stipulated sum of $600/1000 for purchase and delivery of Standard Modular Face Brick. B. Section 10441 - Exterior Signage: Include the stipulated sum of $7000 for purchase and delivery of one exterior building sign only. Installation shall be included in the base bid not in the allowance. This excludes address numbers on canopy and any parking signs which should be covered in the base bid. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 2100 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 01 3000 10-9050 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Coordination drawings. E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. F. Number of copies of submittals. G. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, HUD, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. All reports and documentation shall be submitted according to HUD regulations 8. Scheduling. D. Architect will record meeting minutes and distribute to owner, HUD, and General Contractor. 3.02 PAYOUT MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. a. Progress of the past 30 days. b. Projected progress of the next 30 days. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Status of RFI's, and Change Orders. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
April 2011 01 3000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 3000 10-9050 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to Work. 13. Review Pay Request Submittal. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Include HUD Form#5372 Construction Progress Schedule with each application for payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents: As-built plans and specifications. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Contractor to provide As-built survey with utility locations shown and HUD surveyor's report #2457 including one survey update at HUD final closing. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit to Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. for review, for Owner's benefit a minimum of one week prior to substantial completion meeting. 3.06 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Upload PDF versions of the submittals to Architect's online Shop Drawing Manager. Each submittal shall be in one single PDF file. General Contractor must include their review stamp on the first page of each submittal. B. Provide required resubmittals and provide distribution of approved copies. C. Provide warranties as specified. Warranties shall not limit length of time for remedy of damages Owner may have by legal statute. Warranties shall be signed by Manufacturer and Contractor. All warranties shall have a start date of substantial completion, except punch list items which will have a start date of final completion. D. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. E. Samples: Submit 2 plus extra samples as to indicate range of color, finish, and texture to be expected; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates.
April 2011 01 3000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 3000 10-9050 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with transmittal sheet. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Submittals without Contractors stamp will be returned to the contractor without review. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. G. Samples and shop drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and details, including adjacent construction. H. Provide products specified or approved equal. Products submitted for substitution shall be submitted with the acceptable documentation and include costs of substitution including related work. I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 3000 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 01 4000 10-9050 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Control of installation. C. Tolerances. D. Testing services. E. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4216 - Definitions. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. B. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
April 2011 01 4000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 4000 10-9050 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 548, and ASTM C 1077. 2. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Illinois. 3. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time specialist on staff to review services. 4. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
April 2011 01 4000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 4000 10-9050 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
April 2011 01 4000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 01 4000 10-9050 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 4000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 01 4216 10-9050 DEFINITIONS
SECTION 01 4216 - DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage. B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use. C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment. D. Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Supply: Same as Furnish. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 4216 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 01 5000 10-9050 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone and facsimile service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Waste removal facilities and services. G. Project identification sign. H. Field offices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5813 - Temporary Project Signage. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: C. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.07 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.09 WASTE REMOVAL
April 2011 01 5000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5000 10-9050 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. 1.10 PROJECT SIGNS - See Section 01 5813 1.11 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate minimum 10 persons. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 5000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
SECTION 01 5713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Performance bond. E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Limits on clearing; disposition of vegetative clearing debris. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Temporary and permanent grade changes for erosion control. C. Section 32 9219 - Seeding: Permanent turf for erosion control. D. Section 32 9223 - Sodding: Permanent turf for erosion control. E. Section 32 9300 - Plants: Permanent plantings for erosion control. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. B. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. C. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. D. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. E. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. F. ASTM D 4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples. G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit. H. EPA 832-R-92-005 - Storm Water Management for Construction Activities; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. I. FHWA FLP-94-005 - Best Management Practices for Erosion and Sediment Control; Federal Highway Administration. J. USDA TR-55 - Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds; USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all requirements of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for erosion and sedimentation control, as specified for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Phases I and II, under requirements for the 2003 Construction General Permit (CGP), whether the project is required by law to comply or not. B. Comply with all requirements of the City for erosion and sedimentation control. C. Best Management Practices Standard: EPA 832-R-92-005. D. Best Management Practices Standard: Federal Highway Administration Best Management Practices for Erosion and Sediment Control. E. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports.
April 2011 01 5713 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
F. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained and erosion control measures are in place; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. 1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations. G. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. H. Timing: Put preventive measures in place prior to or simultaneously with disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. I. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. J. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. K. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. L. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. M. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. N. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. O. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
April 2011 01 5713 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
B. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. C. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. D. Maintenance Instructions: Provide instructions covering inspection and maintenance for temporary measures that must remain after Substantial Completion. E. Contractor to file Notice of Termination (NOT) with IEPA for NPDES permit prior to substantial completion. Copy to be submitted to the architect with closeout materials. If the site is not sufficiently stabilized, or contractor fails to file Notice of Termination (NOT) within 12 months of initial filing of Notice of Intent (NOI), contractor shall be responsible for all fees required to renew the Notice of Intent (NOI). 1. Architect/Engineer will file the Notice of Intent (NOI) with the IEPA as required to receive authorization for all discharges of stormwater associated with activity from construction sites that will result in the disturbance of one or more total acres. The contractor will receive said authorization under General NPFES Permit No. ILR10. The initial filing fee of $500 will be paid by the owner. It should be noted that the fee indicated above, which is currently $500 per construction site, is an annual fee which will be invoiced by the IEPA for as long as the NPDES Stormwater Discharge Permit is outstanding. To minimize annual fees, the contractor will need to file the required Notice of Termination (NOT) with IEPA, as soon as the construction site is fully stabilized with at least 70% of the vegetation well established, as referenced in the permit requirements. General Contractor shall be responsible for any annual fees incurred after initial filing fee of $500 paid by the owner. 2. In accordance with NPDES Permit No. ILR10 the contractor will be responsible for the following: a. Designating an individual, probably the site superintendent, to be responsible for keeping the SWPPP (Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan) at the construction site with all supplemental material and amendments/modifications, as required by General NPFES Permit b. Designating an individual or individuals to be responsible for conducting, at regular designated intervals, site inspections of un stabilized areas, structural erosion control measures, areas where vehicles enter or exit the site, etc. Reports of these inspections are to be maintained on the site as part of the SWPPP, and are to be kept on file for three (3) years after the project is complete. Also, a record of the dates when major grading activities occur, when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site, and when stabilization measures are initiated should be included as part of the SWPPP. c. Implementing modifications to the construction site and/or SWPPP based on the above referenced reports. d. Implementing amendments to the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan wherever there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance that has a significant change to the discharge of stormwater to "Waters of the State". or in order to achieve proper control of pollutants contained within the stormwater discharge associated with the site construction activity. e. Filling the Required Notice of Termination (NOT) as referenced above. f. Completing and submitting an Incidence of Noncompliance (ION) report within 5 days of an "Incidence of Noncompliance" (if such incidence should occur) for any violation of the SWPPP observed during an inspection. This includes a statement detailing any environmental impact that may have resulted from noncompliance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Straw or hay.
April 2011 01 5713 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
2. Wood waste, chips, or bark. 3. Erosion control matting or netting. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard. F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot. 2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section. 3. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. G. Gravel: See Section 32 1123 for aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. b. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage channels and swales that traverse disturbed areas. c. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes.
April 2011 01 5713 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
d. Perpendicular to flow across the bottom of existing and new drainage channels and swales that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas; space at maximum of 100 feet apart. e. Across the entrances to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. 1. Wood Waste: Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter; no anchoring required. 2. Asphalt: Use only where no traffic, either vehicular or pedestrian, is anticipated. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Embed bottom of fabric in a trench on the upslope side of fence, with 2 inches of fabric laid flat on bottom of trench facing upslope; backfill trench and compact. 7. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 8. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: a. Four 3/4 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails. b. Five 17-gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 1/2 inch legs. 9. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. 10. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row turned uphill.
April 2011 01 5713 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. D. Mulching Over Large Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 2-1/2 tons per acre; anchor using dull disc harrow or emulsified asphalt applied using same spraying machine at 100 gallons of water per ton of mulch. 2. Wood Waste: Apply 6 to 9 tons per acre. 3. Asphalt: Apply at 1200 gallons per acre. 4. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. E. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth. 2. Wood Waste: Apply 2 to 3inches depth. 3. Asphalt: Apply 1/4 gallon per square yard. 4. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect.
April 2011 01 5713 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 01 5713 10-9050 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 5713 - 7
Wallace Place Apartments 01 5813 10-9050 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
SECTION 01 5813 - TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project identification sign. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity. B. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color , foundation , structure and grades of members. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as selected. E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, colors as selected. 2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. One painted sign, 32 sq ft area, bottom 6 feet above ground. B. Content: 1. Project Rendering title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Names and titles of authorities (HUD) and Funding Agencies. 3. Names and titles of Architect. 4. Name of Prime Contractor. 5. Space to post wage rates. 6. Sign layout shall be approved by owner and architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site. C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing. 3.02 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 5813 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 01 6000 10-9050 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
April 2011 01 6000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 6000 10-9050 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product in all respects. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related cost under this contract except architect's redesign fees and that he Waives claims for additional costs or time extension related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request; when they are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier; or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. By Providing substitute products the contractor shall assume responsibility for and pay costs for the following 1. Making changes to the work of other trades necessitated by the substitutions, in order for the substitutions to be properly installed. 2. If substitution necessitates change in structural work: a. Provide structural drawings, sealed by a licensed structural engineer, which detail the structural changes. b. Making the structural changes in accordance with those structural drawings. 3. Electrical work, such as conduits, disconnect switches, starters, breakers, fuses, and wire sizes, voltage and phases shown on electrical drawings are selected on the basis of the prime scheduled and specified equipment of the General, Plumbing, HVAC, and fire protection Drawings and Specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor furnishing alternate or substitute equipment to provide and pay for all changes to such Electrical work, due to increased current requirements, horsepower, amps, watts, voltage, phase, or motor sizes. The contractor furnishing alternate or substitute equipment shall pay for different conduits, disconnect switches, starters, breakers, fuses, and wire sizes, and installation. Contractor shall submit to the architect written documentation of such changes in Electrical work. Such changes shall be approved by Architect before installation. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. Substitution Approval Form ,which immediatly follows this section, must be included with each request. Include product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Submit name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Submit Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List significant variations. Provide data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. Submit Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.
April 2011 01 6000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 6000 10-9050 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
5. Submit designation of required license fees or royalties, availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. 6. Submit list of changes required in other work or products. 7. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. H. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of Architect. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 6000 - 3
SUBSTITUTION APPROVAL FORM
PROJECT: Wallace Place Apartments Loves Park, IL (10-9050)
Request for substitution requires burden of proof on Proposer and constitutes a representation that the submitter:
Yes No Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified product in all respects. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required
for the work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related cost under this contract except architect's redesign fees and that he waives claims for additional
costs or time extension related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. Will reimburse Owner and Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. for review or redesign
services associated with re-approval by authorities.
Submit three (3) copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. Substitution Approval Form must be included with each request. Include product identification, including manufacturer's name and model no.
Submit Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List significant variations. Provide data relating to changes in construction schedule.
Submit list of changes required in other work or products.
PRODUCT SPECIFIED: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Manufacturer: Manufacturer:
Model #: Model #:
Cost: Cost:
COST DIFFERENCE:
Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. Company Name Architect Firm
Signature Signature
Date Date
Approved Not Approved
Comments:______
April 2011 01 6000 - Attachment
Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Cutting and patching. C. Surveying for laying out the work. D. Cleaning and protection. E. Starting of systems and equipment. F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. H. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. C. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities. D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. E. Section 02 4100 - Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof; site utility demolition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Date and time work will be executed. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Illinois and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Illinois. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.
April 2011 01 7000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. E. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. F. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
April 2011 01 7000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. J. Contractor shall provide 2 copies of final as-built survey showing utility locations and 2 copies surveyor's report HUD #2457. Contractor to provide one subsequent update to the as built survey as required by HUD. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work.
April 2011 01 7000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to specified condition. E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. M. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
April 2011 01 7000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.11 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
April 2011 01 7000 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7000 10-9050 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for ONE year from date of Substantial Completion. D. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 7000 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7800 10-9050 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Prerequisites to Substantial Completion. 1. Punch list with items of delayed completion and its value. 2. Support documentation. 3. Complete Operation and Maintenance manuals 4. Warranties and Certificates as required by other sections of this manual. 5. Occupancy permit. 6. Start-up testing of building systems and copies of test results. 7. Change over of Locks. 8. Air handling balance report. B. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. C. Prerequisites to final acceptance. 1. Final payment request with supporting affidavit.#2448 2. Completed Punch List 3. As-built survey and surveyor's report #2457 provided by the general contractor. 4. Copy of Notice of Termination (NOT) filed with IEPA for NPDES Permit. See section 01575 - Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. D. Provide Closeout Procedures 1. Turnover to owner personnel. 2. Final Cleaning and touch-up. 3. Removal of temporary facilities. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit one copy of completed documents in PDF format 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 2. Submit two hardcopy sets and one CD with PDF copy of Manual of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. F. Warranties and Bonds: 1. Make submittals within 10 days before Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION
April 2011 01 7800 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7800 10-9050 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Provide 2 hard copies of As-Built Drawings and Specs and one CD including PDF copy of As-Built Drawings, Project Manual, and all shop drawings. G. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
April 2011 01 7800 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7800 10-9050 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows:
April 2011 01 7800 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 01 7800 10-9050 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Certificates. c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect , Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. END OF SECTION
April 2011 01 7800 - 4
HUD Survey Instructions U.S. Department of Housing OMB Approval No. 2502-0010 and Urban Development (exp. 08/31/2013) and Report Office of Housing for Insured Multifamily Projects Federal Housing Commissioner Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 0.5 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This agency may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. This information is necessary to secure a marketable title and title insurance for the property that provides security for project mortgage insurance furnished under the FHA multifamily programs. This information assists in making determinations regarding the property’s compliance with applicable program regulations, e.g., those pertaining to flood hazard, and in reaching underwriting determinations regarding property suitability and worth for the intended use. This information is mandatory. HUD does not assure confidentiality and there are no sensitive questions. This survey is to be used in a loan transaction for which the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is to insure a multifamily project mortgage. Its uses will include: Special Project Features: Land title recordation (all cases). Care Facility, Site grading plan preparation (item 1 below). Condo/Air-rights, and/or Plot plan design/redesign (item 2 below). Other: (Specify)
Standards of Performance: In every instance the survey and map(s) 3. Condo/Air-rights Involved: The surveyor must provide a survey and/or plat(s) must be made in accordance with the requirements for made in accordance with any applicable jurisdictional require- an “ALTA/ACSM Land Title Survey” and in compliance with the: ments or, in the absence of such requirements, professionally • Minimum Standard Detail Requirements and Classifications for recognized standards. ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys, as adopted by the American 4. Flood Hazard Involved: Where any portion of the site is subject Land Title Association and American Congress on Surveying and to flood hazard, show the 100 year return frequency flood hazard Mapping, dated 2005; elevation and flood zone for all projects plus the 500 year return • Table A, Optional Survey Responsibilities and Specifications, frequency flood hazard elevation and flood zone for care facility thereof, items 1 through 4 and 7 through 13 except for subitems 7b projects. For existing projects show the site elevation at the and 7c, & 16, 17 & 18; entrances, lowest habitable finished floor, and basement for each primary building and the vehicular parking area that services each • and the following requirements as applicable: primary building. Take return frequency flood hazard elevations 1. Site Grading Involved: Comply with table A, item 5. Contours from the applicable Federal Flood Insurance Rate Map. Where such may not exceed 1-foot vertical intervals, except that 2-foot and 5- is not available, take the elevations from available State or local foot vertical intervals may be used where the mean site gradient equivalent data, or when not available, work in conjunction with exceeds 5 percent and 10 percent respectively. Where curbs and/ owner's engineer. or gutters exist, show top of curb and flow line elevations. 5. Blanket Easement Involved. Show on the map/plat the location 2. Plot Plan Design/Redesign Involved: Comply with Table A, Item of any facility that is located within or traverses the property under 6. provisions of a blanket easement. Additional Owner Requirements: The following requirements are not intended to void any other part of this instruction.
Owner's Representative / Contact: Name & Phone No: Address: Surveyor's Report: A current Surveyor’s Report (not more than I made an on the ground survey per record description of the 120 days old) must be included with the survey map(s)/plat(s) land shown hereon located in (city or town, county, township, submitted to HUD for: project design review, construction etc.), on (date); and that it and this (these) map(s) was (were) made contract document sets, as required during construction, upon in accordance with the HUD Survey Instructions and Report, form project completion; and with the map(s)/plat(s) used at initial and HUD-92457, and the requirements for an ALTA/ACSM Land final closing. Title Survey, as defined in the Minimum Standard Detail Require- ments for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys dated 2005. Certification: The survey map/plat must bear the following certification: To the best of my knowledge, belief and information, except as shown hereon: There are no encroachments either way across “I hereby certify to the U.S. Department of Housing and property lines; title lines and lines of actual possession are the Urban Development (HUD), (Borrower), (Sponsor), (Lender), same; and the premises are free of any (subject to a) 100/500 year (Title Insurance Underwriter), (Other), and to their successors return frequency flood hazard, and such flood free (flood) condi- and assigns, that: tion is shown on the Federal Flood Insurance Rate Map, Commu- nity Panel No. (if none, so state).”
form HUD-92457 (02/2006) Previous editions are obsolete Page 1 of 2 ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
Surveyor's Report U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Housing Federal Housing Commissioner
Instructions: Submit a completed, signed Surveyor's Report with all survey map/plat submissions. See the Surveyor's Instructions for required map/plat submissions. Identify pertinent observed and otherwise known conditions on the Surveyor's Report.
I certify that, on (date) , I made a survey of the premises standing in the name of
situated at (city, county, state): known as street numbers and shown on the accompanying survey entitled:
. I made a careful inspection of said premises and of the buildings located thereon at the time of making such survey, and again, on (date) , and on such latter inspection, I found said premises to be standing in the name of: .
In my professional opinion, the following information reflects the conditions observed on the date of the last site inspection or disclosed in the process of researching title to the premise, and I further certify that such conditions(s) are shown on the survey map/plat dated ______or has/have been updated thereon under Revision Date ______. 1. Rights of way, old highways or abandoned roads, lanes or driveways, drains, sewer or water pipes over and across said premises:
2. Springs, streams, rivers, ponds or lakes located, bordering on or running through said premises:
3. Cemeteries or family burying grounds located on said premises:
4. Electricity, or electromagnetic/communications signal, towers, antenna, lines, or line supports located on, overhanging or crossing said premises:
5. Disputed boundaries or encroachments. (If the buildings, projections or cornices thereof or signs affixed thereto, fences or other indications of occupancy encroach upon adjoining properties or the like encroach upon surveyed premises, specify all such):
6. Earth moving work, building construction, or building additions within recent months:
7. Building or possession lines. (In case of city or town property specify definitely as to whether or not walls are independent walls or party walls and as to all easements of support or "Beam Rights." In case of country property report specifically how boundary lines are evidenced, that is, whether by fences or otherwise):
8. Recent street or sidewalk construction and/or any change in street lines either completed or proposed by and available from the controlling jurisdiction:
9. Flood hazard.
10. Site used as a solid waste dump, sump, or sanitary landfill.
Surveyor’s Name: (print or type) License Number: Signature
X
form HUD-92457 (02/2006) Previous editions are obsolete Page 2 of 2 ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
Wallace Place Apartments 03 2000 10-9050 CONCRETE REINFORCING
SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International. C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society. G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. H. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI (DA4), CRSI (P1), and ACI 301. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished. B. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, unfinished. C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
April 2011 03 2000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 03 2000 10-9050 CONCRETE REINFORCING
B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 2 inch. 2. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 3. Slabs on Fill: 3 inch. E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. F. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Division 16. G. Structural Slabs: Install reinforcing fabric in longest practical length. 1. Lap adjoining pieces a minimum of one full mesh and tie splices with tie wire spaced at 18" o.c. 2. Do not make laps midway between support beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. 3. Offset laps in adjacent width to prevent continuous laps. 4. Slabs on Grade: Place reinforcing fabric one-fifth of slab thickness plus 1/4" from top of finished slab. Lap fabric 6" all around and wire together not over 4' apart. END OF SECTION
April 2011 03 2000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete foundation walls. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, and manholes. F. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. F. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. J. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. K. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. L. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. M. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. N. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. O. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. P. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. Q. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. R. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). S. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
April 2011 03 3000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
T. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. F. Submit test Reports for test required in Quality Assurance. G. Submit Mix Designs 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. D. Employ an Illinois Registered Professional Engineer, engaged in soil testing to advise the Architect, in writing, that all footings will have bearing on soil design capacity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Steel. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type G. D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type E. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as
April 2011 03 3000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Permeance of less than 0.01 Perms grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg) per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96 2. Accessories to be used as recommended by manufacturer. a. Seam Tape: Permeance less than 0.3 perms per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96, Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC b. Vapor Proofing Mastic: Permeance less than 0.3 perms per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96, Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC c. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC, www.stegoindustries.com.. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 3000 psi. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/2 inch thick and 4 inches deep ; tongue and groove profile. B. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Height: To suit slab thickness. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. Do not change mix design without written approval from Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3500 psi for foundations; 4,000 psi for slabs on grade. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 3. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 4. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 2.08 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 FORMWORK
April 2011 03 3000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal withough damage to concrete. 1. Chamfer exposed edges/corners to achieve straights lines. 2. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fillting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not show in exposed concrete surfaces. 3. Install void forms. Protect from moisture before concrete placement. Protect from crushing durnig concrete placement. 4. Do-not displace or damage in place vapor retarder. 5. Construct formwork to maintain specified tolerances. B. Inserts, Imbedded parts and openings: 1. Provide formed opening for work embedded in or passing through concrete. 2. Coordinate work with other contractors in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. 3. securely attach anchoring devices, metal profile items, inserts, sleeves, conduit and pipes to formwork in locations not affecting position of main reinforcement or placing concrete. a. Ensure that conduits and pipes embedded in concrete do not displace more than 4% of cross-section area of structural member. b. Ensure that embedded conduits and pipes, other than those merely passing through, are not larger in outside diameter than 1/3 the thickness of slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded; do not space these items closer than 3 dia. o.c. C. Earth forms not permitted. D. Verify that forms are clean and froee of rust before applying release agent. 1. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions. Apply prior to placeing reinforcement, anchoring devices and embedded items. 2. Do not apply form release agent where concrete finishes are scheduled to recieve special finishes and/or applied coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of treated forms with clean water. Keep surface wet prior to placing concrete. E. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. F. Form Removal: 1. Do not remove forms and shoring/bracing until concrete has sufficient stringth to support its own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed on it. Remove load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75% of specified 28 day compressibve strength, provided construction is reshored. 2. Reshored structural members due to design requirements or construction condition to permit successive construction. G. Cleaning Formwork: 1. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds. 2. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 3. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from forms. don not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air to remove foreign matter. 3.03 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: 1. Prior to installing vapor retarder verify fill materials are dry and clean, ready to receive work. Remove all loose and foreign matter and all protuberances. that would puncture or otherwise damage membrane. Coordinate work with progress of work of other trades affected.
April 2011 03 3000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 4 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder beore covering. B. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Use non-shrink grout for grouting of setting plates. See details 2. Mix and apply in strict accordance with grout manufacturer's current printed instructions. 3.04 EXPANSION & CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Properly locate and form expansion, control, isolation, and contraction joints in accord with drawings and approved shop drawings. B. Construction Joints: 1. In addition to locations shown on drawings or approved by Architect/Engineer prior to construction, install construction joints in slabs on fill at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Use keyeways continuing reinforcement through joints. C. Isolation joints: Provide between slabs and vertical elements such as columns and structural walls. D. Control Joints: Provide swan or tooled joints or removable insert strips; depth equal to 1/4 slab thickness. For niterior slabs on grade saw or form control joints between construction joints at 15 ft. on center. See typical slab details. 3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Retamping will not be allowed. D. Do not allow concrete to freefall more than 4 feet. E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. F. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 4 inches and seal watertight. G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. H. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. K. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. L. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. M. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. N. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated. O. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. P. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows:
April 2011 03 3000 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick floor coverings include quarry tile and ceramic tile with full bed setting system. 2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, and seamless flooring. 3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/4 in/ft. nominal. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, or water-fog spray. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure four concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
April 2011 03 3000 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 03 3000 10-9050 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION
April 2011 03 3000 - 7
Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
SECTION 04 2001 - MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay Facing Brick. B. Mortar. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Installation of Lintels. E. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud backup for masonry veneer. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section. B. This allowance includes purchase and delivery of standard modular face bricks. Installation is not included in the allowance but is specified in this section and is part of the Contract Sum/Price. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International. C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. G. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). H. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. I. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. J. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.
April 2011 04 2001 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent damage and contamination by other materials. Follow manufacturers recommendations. B. Store all products in a secure, dry location, out of way of construction operations. Store materials on pallets, a minimum of 4" off of the ground. Prevent intermixing of granular materials. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW). C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 50 of each size, color, and type of masonry units for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color and texture as selected by Architect. 2. Actual size: 2-1/4" x 3 5/8" x 7 5/8". 3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. B. Architectural Cast Stone for all cast stone indicated on the contract documents, including but not limited to banding, sills, and stone cap: Manufactured by PRAIRIE stone Masonry Units manufactured by Northfield Block Company. 1. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard and installed according to manufacturer's printed instruction. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type N. One part portland cement, one half part lime. No more than four and one half parts sand, measured damp and loose. Compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 days; Type M, high strength mortar with 2500psi compressive strength below grade, other types as required by application. B. Water: Clean and potable. C. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. D. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, grade 60 (420) yield grade, deformed billet bars; galvanized. B. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch deformed side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); Product ____: www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
April 2011 04 2001 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
C. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.105 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 2. Wire ties: Triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 5-1/2 inches. 4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1483 inch diameter. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet; 0.040 inch total thickness; with cross-linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces. 1. Flashing system for all heads, sills, shelf angles, thru-wall conditions and other locations. System shall consist of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt laminate flashing material, self-adhesive pre-formed corners and end dams, and stainless steel drip-edge, all provided by a single source and installed as a flashing system. a. Field fabrication of inside corners, outside corners, or end-dams shall not be allowed. All corners and end-dams must be pre-formed by the manufacturer to insure the integrity of all corner conditions. Flashing material shall overlap the pre-formed corners, and end-dams to form a continuous moisture barrier system. b. Stainless steel drip edge shall be provided on the edges of the exterior masonry or shelf angle. Stainless steel drip edge shall measure .015"x2.0"x8.0' and contain a hemmed edge. Stainless steel drip edge shall extend beyond vertical face of masonry wall. 2. Manufacturers: a. Illinois Products Corporation ; Product IPCO flashing system with preformed corners and end dams; stainless steel drip edge and drip edge corners; follow manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Extruded Neoprene Rubber, closed cell virgin material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); Product ____: www.h-b.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding with backer rod. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt. D. Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. b. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America; Product ____: www.wirebond.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and
April 2011 04 2001 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
allow proper cavity drainage. Provide system manufactured by Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, www.wirebond.com. 1. "Mortar Net" Weep Vent 1" thick x 10" height x 5'-0" length trapezoidal configuration. F. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M. 2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER PROTECTION A. Cold weather: Heat mortar water and sand, enclose walls and provide temporary heat as recommended by BIA Tech Notes 1, 1A, 1B, and 1C. B. Hot Weather: Use Mortar within 1-1/2 hour after mixing for ambient 80 degree F or above. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.03 FIRE RATING A. Where rating are indicated, provide assemblies identical to tested assemblies and accepted by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.04 PREPERATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.05 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. Except where areas of special coursing , patterns, and bonding are indicated on drawings. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 12 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Provide full bed, head and collar joints except at weepholes. E. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush. 3.06 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head and collar joints, except at weepholes, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. Keep cavity clean of mortar dropping and other material during construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush. E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
April 2011 04 2001 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Isolate top joint of masonry veneer from horizontal and vertical structural framing members or support angles with compressible joint filler. 3.07 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, at bottom of walls, and ledges. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. Drainage system to be continuous at the base of the wall. C. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Stud back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 2.0 sq ft of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 on center. C. Seismic Reinforcement: Connect veneer anchors with continuous horizontal wire reinforcement before embedding anchors in mortar. 3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. Comply with recommendations of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. 4. Carry flashing vertically as detailed, but not less than 6 inches above horizontal plane. 5. Extend head and sill flashings not less than 6 inches beyond edges of openings and turn up to form watertight pan; seal with mastic. B. Coordination: Interface flashing work with adjacent and adjoining work to ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of completed flashing. C. Stainless steel drip edge shall be held in place during construction with a continous bead of urethane sealant or equivalent. The bent hemmed edge portion of the stainless steel drip edge must extend beyond the vertical face of the masonry wall. D. Install the laminate flashing over the stainless steel drip edge and recessed 3/4" from the vertical face of the masonry wall. This will allow the flashing to be completely covered by mortar when the remainder of the masonry wall is constructed. Overlap the flashing segments and/or any flashing corners and end-dams a minimum of 4" forming a continuous moisture barrier to direct the flow of water to the exterior and/or weep holes. All top edges and overlaps will be sealed with a bead of mastic - as recommended by the flashing manufacturer. E. If flashing terminates in a vertical position, install a bead of mastic, recommended by the manufacturer, along the top edge of the flashing. F. The flashing system is not to be installed when the ambient air temperature is below 25 degree F. G. Flashing material is not to be exposed to direct sunlight for longer than 30 days. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.
April 2011 04 2001 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 04 2001 10-9050 MASONRY VENEER
B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Provide expansion joint as detailed and at spacing no greater than 30 feet O.C. at locations approved by architect. C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance. E. Provide expansion joints as detailed and at spacing no greater than 30'-0" o.c.at locations approved by Architect. 3.12 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, window frames, steel angle, lintels, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other sections. B. Build-in items plumb and true. C. Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build-in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration. 3.13 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/8 inch in 20 ft. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch in 20 ft. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 20 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.14 DAMAGED UNITS A. Remove and replace damaged units B. Enlarge holes in mortar. C. Prepare joints to receive sealant. 3.15 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for sleeves, pipes, conduit, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval from Architect/Engineer prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated on drawings or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.16 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean brick using bucket and brush method in compliance with BIA Tech Note 20. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. E. Repair chips and other surface damage noticable when viewed in direct daylight at 10 feet. 1. Repair methods and results subject to Architect's approval. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION
April 2011 04 2001 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 05 5000 10-9050 METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. F. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric). H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings. L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. M. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283.
April 2011 05 5000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 05 5000 10-9050 METAL FABRICATIONS
D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, hot-dip galvanized finish. E. Fasteners: Zinc coated fasteners designed for loading and use. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1 , galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Verify Dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Joist Hangers: Strap anchors; galvanized finish. B. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of masonry; galvanized finish. C. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. 2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and ferrous metal items at exterior walls and where exposed to metal. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay project. Allow for cutting and fitting if field measurements are not practical. 3.02 PREPARATION
April 2011 05 5000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 05 5000 10-9050 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized , except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION
April 2011 05 5000 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 06 1000 10-9050 ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural wall and roof framing. B. Built-up structural beams and columns. C. Sheathing. D. Preservative treated wood materials. E. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. F. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. G. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. B. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association. F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. B. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. C. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.
April 2011 06 1000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1000 10-9050 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: 15% max.. C. Stud Framing: 1. Species: Hem-Fir. 2. Grade: No. 2. Exterior and Interior Load bearing walls. D. Structural Framing and Timbers: 1. Species: Hem-Fir. 2. Grade: No. 2. E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. F. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 LAMINATED HEADERS A. Laminated headers shall meet or exceed the requirements listed on the structural drawings. B. Composition: 1. The term "Structural Glue Laminate Timber" refers to an engineered, stress rated product of a timber laminating plant, comprising of assemblies of specially selected and prepared wood laminations securely bonded together with adhesives. 2. The grain of all laminations is approximately parallel longitudinally. 3. Lumber used for laminating is structurally graded in accordance with the standard grading provision for the species and supplementary specifications, surfaced to laminating tolerances and dried according to the required moisture content at the time of gluing. 4. Adhesives of structural glue laminated timber must comply with the specifications contained in ANSI/AITC A190.1. 2.04 TIMBERS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry (15 percent maximum). C. Beams and Posts 5 inches and over in thickness: 1. Species and Grade: As indicated on the structural drawings. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated OSB Sheathing, Exposure 1, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 48/24. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, nominal. B. Wall Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated OSB Sheathing, Exposure 1, and as follows:
April 2011 06 1000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1000 10-9050 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. Span Rating: 32/16. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Provide connectors manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A 653/A 653M. C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Provide hangers manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie Co.. D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/2 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. 2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA Use Category UC4A, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.4 lb/cu ft retention. D. Treat wood exposed to deterioration by moisture such as items in contact with roof, flashing, waterproofing, masonry, concrete, or the ground including posts, plates, or as shown on drawings. E. Treat wood subject to insect attack. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
April 2011 06 1000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1000 10-9050 ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. G. Install 2-Ply studs below all truss girders. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels to framing members, with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. 1. Use sheathing clips between roof framing members. 2. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 3. Screw panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, or screw. 1. Place air infiltration barrier over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION
April 2011 06 1000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1753 10-9050 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
SECTION 06 1753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof and floor framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Material requirements for blocking, bridging, plates, and miscellaneous framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 446 - Galvanized Sheet Steel, Grade A, Coating G60. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. C. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Truss Plate Institute. D. TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute. E. BCSI 1 - Building Component Safety Information Booklet: The Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; joint publication of the Truss Plate Institute and the Wood Trust Council of America F. TPI HIB-91 - Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute. G. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. H. PS-20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard I. NFPA - National Forest Products Association - National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Submit for approval shop drawings and product data. C. Submit shop drawings prior to fabrication. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Roof Truss: Indicate truss framing plans; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress increase; force analysis of each member; pitch, span and spacing of trusses; gauge thickness, nominal sizes and location of connectors at joints; bearing and anchorage details; framed openings; permanent bracing and bridging. Submit manufacturer's instructions on lateral bracing. 2. Shop drawings to bear seal of structural engineer Registered in the State of Illinois. E. A complete set of design calculations reviewed, stamped, and approved by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Illinois must accompany the shop drawing submittal. F. Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until shop drawings and design calculations have been reviewed and accepted by Structural Engineer and Architect 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Roof Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with TPI 1, TPI DSB-89, and HIB-91. B. Lumber used in the manufacturer of trusses: grade stamp clearly visible, indicating conformance with NFPA. C. Truss supplier shall be responsible for long term deflection of trusses.
April 2011 06 1753 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1753 10-9050 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria and fire retardant requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with BCSI 1. B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plate Connected Wood Roof Trusses: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc: www.alpeng.com. 2. MiTek Industries, Inc: www.mii.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Grade: Per manufacturer's design, . 2. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 3. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide Roof Trusses: standard dimension lumber connected by metal plates. 1. Wood: Softwood meeting stress rating and design requirements. 2. Connection plates: ASTM A446, grade A steel, minimum .036" thick; G-60 galvanized to ASTM A 525. 3. Lateral Support: as recommended by truss manufacturer. C. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as indicated. D. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking and Framing for Openings: Softwood lumber, Spruce/Pine/Fir, construction grade, 19 percent maximum and 7 percent minimum moisture content. B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. C. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1; maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
April 2011 06 1753 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 06 1753 10-9050 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Temporary construction loads which cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. F. Ensure truss ends have sufficient bearing area. G. Install permanent bridging and bracing. H. Install headers and supports to frame openings required. I. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06 1000. J. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section. 3.04 WARRANTY A. The product delivered to the site shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and material. The products shall perform to manufacturers specifications for the normal and expected life of the building. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position. END OF SECTION
April 2011 06 1753 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 06 2000 10-9050 FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 6150-Cast Marble Fabrications: Cultured Marble window stools. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. F. Section 12 3530 - Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards. E. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inches long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, grades as indicated. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. PART 2 PRODUCTS
April 2011 06 2000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 06 2000 10-9050 FINISH CARPENTRY
2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: Red oak species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 8 percent with closed grain , of quality suitable for transparent finish, exposure and loading. B. Prefinished Wood for moldings, bases, casing, and miscellaneous trim. 1. Finish to match wood door. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: Veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; Oak face species. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of 45 pound density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side (S1S). 2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, 0.050 inches thick ; color as selected ; satin finish. B. Laminate Backing: Minimum 45 pound density particle board on 5/8" plywood. 2.05 ADHESIVE 2.06 FASTENINGS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; mill finish in concealed locations and polished finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking : Softwood lumber of pine species. B. Glass: Type as indicated on drawings and as specified in Section 08 8000. C. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. D. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. E. Hardware: See Section 08710-Finish Hardware. 2.08 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of as required by code or local Authorities, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Vehicle for preservation compatible with finish. B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. Vehicle for preservation compatible with finish. C. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking. D. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material. E. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. F. Kiln dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 15 percent moisture content. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection.
April 2011 06 2000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 06 2000 10-9050 FINISH CARPENTRY
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. 2.10 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. D. Stain, seal, and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only. E. Seal internal surfaces and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. F. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. G. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. C. See Section 06 1000-Rough Carpentry for installation of recessed wood blocking. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. C. Install trim with nails at 6 inch on center. D. Install hardware supplied by Section 08 7100 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Interior: 1. Handrails: Factory or shop fabricated with preformed end caps and internal and external corners: a. Comply with applicable requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. b. Handrail to support vertical live load of 100 lb/lineal ft with deflection not to exceed 1/50 of span between supports. Resist lateral force of 250 lobs at any point without damage or permanent set. c. Materials Wood, oak species, finish as selected from manufacturer's standard finishes. d. Surface mounted e. Projection from wall to outside of rail: 3 inches f. Clear Space from wall: 1-1/2 inch. g. Return rail to wall. h. InPro Corporation: product 2000W - HR9 Northern Woods full wrap Handrail: www.inprocorp.com 1) Bracket: Stainless Steel - 2001SS 2) Left Return: 2002W 3) Right Return: 2003W
April 2011 06 2000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 06 2000 10-9050 FINISH CARPENTRY
4) Ins/Outs 90deg corner: 2004W i. Rail board shall be Red Oak unfinished to be finished on site with stain selected by Architect, see section 09 9000 painting. Nominal 1"x8" board with chamfered edges. Fill all nail holes. 1) Provide rail boards behind handrails. Handrail on one side of corridor only. 2. Casing shall match pre-finished wood doors, colonial style. Fill all nail holes. 3. 12" Wood base shall be constructed of 2-3/4" field finished red oak colonial style base (358O - 9/16" x 2-3/4" by Mouldings and Millwork) above 3/4" x 9-1/4" field finished red oak board with kerfed back and top edge chamfered. Quarter round shoe molding shall be installed at all base board locations to cover up any gaps between the flooring and the base. Contractor's option to provide prefinished wood to match pre-finished wood door in lieu of stain finish. Fill all nail holes. 4. 4" Wood base shall be Red Oak Unfinished to be finished on site with stain selected by Architect, see section 09 9000 Painting. Product 22136-CBO size 11/16" x 4-1/4" as manufactured by Moulding and Millwork; www.mouldingandmillwork.com. Quarter round shoe molding shall be installed at all base board locations to cover up any gaps between the flooring and the base. Contractor's option to provide prefinished wood to match pre-finished wood door in lieu of stain finish. Fill all nail holes. 5. Provide one Knox box for fire department keys. Mount in location indicated by local fire department - recess. Contractor to purchase directly from fire department or purchase model specified by local fire department. END OF SECTION
April 2011 06 2000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 06 6150 10-9050 CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS
SECTION 06 6150 - CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Synthetic marble countertops with integral lavatory bowls. B. Synthetic marble window sills. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Submittals, Products and Substitutions, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's printed product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's cleaning and maintenance data. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit plans, elevations, and detail sections. 2. Indicate overall dimensions, material thickness, anchorage provisions and attachment methods. 3. Indicate coordination requirements for adjacent and interfacing work. D. Selection Samples: For each product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of International Cast Polymer Association (ICPA), with not less than five years of experience in manufacturing products similar to those required for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Not less than five installations of comparable scope within the past three years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Pack products in wooden crates to minimize shipping damage. Palletize other components. B. Check for shipping damage during unloading at site and notify manufacturer immediately of any obvious damage. C. Store products under cover, off the ground, and protected from moisture. Handle products to prevent physical damage. Protect surfaces from staining, scratching, and other damage during handling and installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify shop drawings with field measurements. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities of this section with construction activities specified in related sections. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7000 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Window Sills: Manufacturer's standard ten-year limited warranty on defective materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
April 2011 06 6150 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 06 6150 10-9050 CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS
A. Provide cast marble fabrications made of proprietary resin and gel coat finish with finished properties as described under specific product types. B. Adhesives and Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9005, and as follows: 1. To adhere cast marble panels to gypsum wallboard, use LN-601 Liquid Nails, Nail-No-More, or other product recommended by manufacturer. 2. For joints between cast marble panels, use a mildew resistant 100 percent silicone joint sealer; siliconized calking compound is not acceptable. 3. For sealing cast marble panels at adjoining surfaces such as gypsum wallboard, use mildew resistant acrylic calk joint sealer, such as Phenoseal Acrylic Caulk by Gibson-Homans, or other product recommended by cast marble panel manufacturer. C. Polishing Cream: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.02 VANITY TOPS AND LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS A. Material: Manufacturer's standard proprietary cast marble material. B. Configuration: Homogeneous with integral backsplash, minimum thickness of 3/4 inch; other dimensions as indicated on the drawings. 1. Provide end splashes of matching material. C. Integral Lavatory Bowls: Cast elliptical depression; comply with ANSI Z124.3 and test quarterly on a random basis by accredited laboratory. 1. Bowl depth 6-1/8". Provide offset bowl to meet fair housing guidelines and as indicated on the plans. D. Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.03 WINDOW SILLS A. Material: Manufacturer's standard proprietary cast marble material. B. Configuration: Minimum thickness of 5/8 inch; other dimensions as indicated on the drawings. C. Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Use molds, materials, methods, and procedures that will result in proper texture and finish. B. Fabricate to required profiles and dimensions. To the greatest extent possible, fabricate each unit as a continuous piece, without joints, and configured to minimize on-site cutting or other modifications. C. Ease all edges and sand smooth; provide uniform gloss finish on all exposed surfaces. D. Cure components prior to shipping, and remove traces of material that may be toxic or incompatible with other building materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install components to be plumb, level, and rigid. Neatly scribe to adjoining surfaces, and field trim as required for snug fit. Replace any component that is cracked, chipped, broken, or otherwise defective. B. Vanity Tops and Lavatory Countertops: Install on rigid wooden framework, following manufacturer's recommended procedures. C. Window Sills: Attach to solid substrate with silicone joint sealer, as recommended by manufacturer.
April 2011 06 6150 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 06 6150 10-9050 CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS
3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
April 2011 06 6150 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 06 8200 10-9050 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
SECTION 06 8200 - PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cellular pvc trim boards for exterior trim. 1.02 Related Sections A. 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D792 - Density and Specific Gravity of Plastics by Displacement. B. ASTM D570 - Water Absorption of Plastics. C. ASTM D638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D1761 - Mechanical Fasteners in Wood. E. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight. F. ASTM D256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. G. ASTM D696 - Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 Degrees Celsius and 30 Degrees celsius with a Vitreous silica Dilatometer. H. ASTM D635 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. I. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM D648 - Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. K. ASTM D3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products. C. Samples: Submit two material samples, 3 x 3 inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Trim materials should be stored on a flat and level surface on a full shipping pallet. Handle materials to prevent damage to product edges and corners. Store materials under a protective covering to prevent jobsite dirt and residue from collecting on the boards. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 25 year warranty against defects in manufacturing that cause the products to rot, corrode, delaminate, or excessively swell from moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cellular PVC Trim Fabrications: 1. AZEK Trimboards manufactured by Vycom Corporation, 801 Corey Street, Moosic, PA 18507. 2. Fypon, Ltd. Trimboards; www.fypon.com 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cellular PVC: 1. Free foam cellular pvc material with a small-cell microstructure and density of .55 grams/cm^3. B. Fasteners:
April 2011 06 8200 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 06 8200 10-9050 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
1. Use hot-dipped galvanized fasteners designed for wood trim and wood siding. Space as recommended by the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2. Fasteners should be long enough to penetrate the solid wood substrate a minimum of 1-1/2". C. Adhesives: 1. Glue all joints such as window surround, long fascia runs, etc. with manufacturer's cellular pvc cement to prevent joint separation. 2. Secure glue joint with a fastener on each side of joint to allow adequate bonding time. 3. Surfaces to be glued should be smooth, clean, and in complete contact with each other. D. Sealants: 1. Use urethane, polyurethane, or acrylic based sealants without silicone. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fabrications in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
April 2011 06 8200 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 2100 10-9050 THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall and underside of floor slabs. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. C. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: 2 3/16 inches. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Water Absorption: 3 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM D 2842. 7. Compressive Resistance: 5 psi. 8. R-value at 75 degrees F per 1" of thickness: 4.0 min 9. Manufacturer: ACH Foam Technologies: www.achfoam.com. Product: EPS Type II 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed mineral fiber blanket; friction fit, conforming to the following:
April 2011 07 2100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 2100 10-9050 THERMAL INSULATION
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for facing, if any. 3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 4. Thermal Resistance: As indicated on drawings. 5. Facing: Unfaced. 6. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 15 mil thick. B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. C. Nails or Staples: steel wire; electroplated, or galvanized; type and size to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed insulation surfaces. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.04 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Retain insulation batts in place with spindle fasteners at 12 inches on center. F. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. G. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. H. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
April 2011 07 2100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 2100 10-9050 THERMAL INSULATION
I. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 2100 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 07 2126 10-9050 BLOWN INSULATION
SECTION 07 2126 - BLOWN INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Attic: Loose insulation pneumatically placed and poured into joist spaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 739 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM C 1015 - Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements , in conjunction with Section 07 2100. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedure for preparation and installation. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with Section 07 2100 for placement of insulation materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Blown Insulation: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, glass fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic placement. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F). 2. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings. B. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling spaces. C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Place insulation against baffles. Do not impede natural attic ventilation to soffit. C. Place against and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. D. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.
April 2011 07 2126 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 2126 10-9050 BLOWN INSULATION
3.03 CLEANING A. Remove loose insulation residue. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Attic Spaces: Pour insulation between ceiling joists to achieve an R value of 38. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 2126 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 3113 10-9050 ASPHALT SHINGLES
SECTION 07 3113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection. C. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings. C. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. D. Section 07710 - Manufacturer Roof Specialties: Attic space vent within shingled roof area. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. C. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules. D. ASTM D 4869 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. F. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern ; for color selection. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Standard 30 year warranty. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface or ambient air temperatures are below 45 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens Corning Corp; Product Oakridge Architectural Style Shingle: www.owenscorning.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D 3462; Class A fire resistance.
April 2011 07 3113 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 3113 10-9050 ASPHALT SHINGLES
1. Color: As selected. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhereing polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and pollyethylene sheet top surface. . B. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic felt underlayment, complying with ASTM D 4869, minimum 8 lb/100 sq ft (Type I). C. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, .08 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 1/2 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of underlayment, free of toxic solvents. C. Ridge Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather entry; flanged to receive shingles. 1. 17 sq. in. per liner foot net free area 2.04 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal gable edge. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. 4. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint. B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.016 inch thick; PVC coating, color as selected. C. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape. B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. D. Install eave edge and gable edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT
April 2011 07 3113 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 3113 10-9050 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection. B. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A. Install one ply of flexible flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over valleys. B. Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches. D. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. E. At Exposed Valleys: Install minimum 36 inches wide roll roofing with mineral surface side up over first layer of protection, centered. Apply a 4 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. 3.06 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5-1/3 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches from valley center line to achieve closed cut valley, concealing the valley protection. F. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley protection. G. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails. H. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting. I. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings. J. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 3113 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 07 4633 10-9050 PLASTIC SIDING
SECTION 07 4633 - PLASTIC SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl siding and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation board applied over sheathing before siding installation. C. Section 07 6400 - Aluminum Soffit D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding. B. VSI (INST) - Vinyl Siding Installation Manual; Vinyl Siding Institute, Society of the Plastics Industry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. B. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. D. Provide samples of manufacturer's entire color line for selection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Not less than three years of experience with products specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mastic Home Exteriors, Product T-LOK Barkwood; www.mastic.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Siding: Comply with ASTM D 3679 Class 2. 2. Wind Resistance: Capable of withstanding minimum of 30 psf negative pressure, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 5206. B. Horizontal Vinyl Siding: 1. Profile: Clapboard, 6" inches wide; 6 inch exposure. 2. Thickness: 0.048 inch, minimum. 3. Length: 12 feet, minimum. 4. Nailing Hem: Single layer, with 1-1/8 inch long nail holes at maximum 18 inches on center. 5. Finish: Woodgrain. 6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. Accessories: Provide coordinating accessories made of same material as required for complete and proper installation whether or not specifically shown on the drawings.
April 2011 07 4633 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 4633 10-9050 PLASTIC SIDING
1. Starter Strip: Single-row nailing hem with elongated nailing holes 1-1/4 inches long at 18 inches on center, with 1/4 inch base projection. 2. J-Channel Trim: 1 inches. 3. Corner Posts: a. Outside: Universal. D. Fasteners: Aluminum nails, alloy 5056 or 6110, with minimum tensile strength of 63,000 pounds per square inch; length as required to penetrate framing at least 3/4 inch. E. Joint Sealers: As specified in Section 07 9005. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation; verify dimensions and acceptability of substrate. B. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install siding, soffit, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and Vinyl Siding Institute's Installation Manual. B. Attach securely to framing, not sheathing, with horizontal components true to level and vertical components true to plumb, providing a weather resistant installation. C. Install joint sealers between siding/soffit/trim and adjacent construction, using procedures specified in Section 07 9005. D. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 4633 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 6200 10-9050 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. B. Flashings, counterflashings, sheet metal roofing, and fabricated sheet metal items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing. B. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. C. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. D. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric. F. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. G. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating of color as selected. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Hook strip or Clip Type, Same material and finish as flashing metal. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
April 2011 07 6200 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 6200 10-9050 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
D. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9005. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. F. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. All flashing to be shop formed except where authorized by Architect. B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Form pieces in 8 foot lengths.. Make allowance for expansion joint. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 6200 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 6400 10-9050 ALUMINUM SOFFIT
SECTION 07 6400 - ALUMINUM SOFFIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum soffits. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed product data and installation instructions for specified products. C. Selection Samples: Submit two sets of color chips of manufacturer's full range of colors for Architect 's selection. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in original packaging. B. Store products in original packaging, on flat surface under cover, stacked no more than 12 boxes high. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's lifetime limited warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mastic Home Exteriors, Inc. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ALUMINUM SOFFIT PANELS A. Aluminum Soffit Preformance Metals Economy Aluminum: 1. Style: Triple 4 inch full vented panels, 1/2 inch deep, with triple 4 inch wide faces forming V-grooves at 4 inches on center. 2. Net free area 13 sq.in./lf 3. Thickness: Nominal .04 inch; aluminum alloy. 4. Interlocking edges and elongated nailing hems. 5. Finish: Alumalure 2000; two-phase operation including corrosion-inhibiting primer and baked-on high-performance acrylic topcoat. 6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full line. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories: Aluminum of same thickness and finish as siding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation of siding and soffit products; verify dimensions and acceptability of substrate. B. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Attach panels to substrate interlocked and lapped for weathertight installation, nails concealed; install horizontal components true to level and vertical components true to plumb.
April 2011 07 6400 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 6400 10-9050 ALUMINUM SOFFIT
1. Space siding nails at 16 inches on center; center nails in nailing slots without binding to allow for thermal movement. C. Paint or otherwise protect dissimilar metals in contact. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water. B. After completing installation, remove from project site excess materials and debris resulting from installation. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 6400 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 7100 10-9050 ROOF SPECIALTIES
SECTION 07 7100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including vents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Louvered Vents: 1. Lomanco ; Product Slant Back Type. Model #770D. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roof Vents: Formed aluminum, with 140 sq in minimum free area of ventilation. Provide Slant Back Type. Model #770D manufactured by Lomanco. 1. Finish: Baked enamel. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full line of standard colors 2.03 FINISHES A. Baked Enamel: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; polyester baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing and flashings. C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water tightness. D. Install units plumb and level; isolate dissimilar materials to prevent corrosion. E. Touch up damaged coatings.
April 2011 07 7100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 7100 10-9050 ROOF SPECIALTIES
END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 7100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 7123 10-9050 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
SECTION 07 7123 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts. B. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick. 1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated. C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. B. Downspout Boots: Plastic; Color: to match downspouts. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal.
April 2011 07 7123 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 7123 10-9050 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and solder gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. D. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system as indicated on Civil Drawings. Grout connection watertight. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using secure fasteners. F. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot min. G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Seal connection water tight. H. Set splash pads under downspouts. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 7123 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 8400 10-9050 FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies , whether indicated on drawings or not. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. C. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation. D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL or FM will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Color: Black, dark gray, or red. 3. Manufacturers: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
April 2011 07 8400 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 8400 10-9050 FIRESTOPPING
c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers: a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. USG: www.usg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. c. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and collar, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to the following: 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to the following: 1. Potential Expansion: Minimum 1000 percent. 2. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 3. Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
April 2011 07 8400 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 8400 10-9050 FIRESTOPPING
C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C. Install labelling required by code. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 8400 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 07 9005 10-9050 JOINT SEALERS
SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Hollow gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. E. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell). F. ASTM D 2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for concrete Pavements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and surface preparation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. 4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants:
April 2011 07 9005 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 07 9005 10-9050 JOINT SEALERS
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. 4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. 4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Dymonic manufactured by Tremco. 3. Product: Dynatrol manufactured by Pecora. 4. Product: Sonolastic NP manufactured by BASF. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: ASTM D 2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene) compression gasket. 1. Black color. 2. Size and Shape: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior wall expansion joints. C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Product: JS-773 manufactured by Tremco. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Tremflex 834 manufactured by Tremco. 3. Product: AC-220 manufactured by Pecora. 4. Product: Sonolastic NP manufactured by Sonneborne. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Product: Tremsil 200 manufactured by Tremco.
April 2011 07 9005 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 07 9005 10-9050 JOINT SEALERS
2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. F. Type ___ - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations: Permanently tacky non-hardening butyl sealant. G. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G , O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior Joints. b. Vertical Surfaces. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
April 2011 07 9005 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 07 9005 10-9050 JOINT SEALERS
3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION
April 2011 07 9005 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1113 10-9050 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. E. Steel glazing frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. F. ASTM C 236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989 (Reapproved 1993). G. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. H. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames. I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. J. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. K. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. L. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. M. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. N. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.
April 2011 08 1113 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1113 10-9050 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com. 2. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 3. Contractor's option to use prefinished Timely frames with a colonial style snap on trim at knock down frame locations. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. If pre-finished option is selected Architect to be able to select from timely's pre-matched standard finishes. 8. Hollow metal doors to match frame finish selected by Architect. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. Fill all interior voids 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF180 coating. 4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 236. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. B. Interior Doors , Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). 3. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule , tested in accordance with NFPA 252. a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness for Stair Doors: 450 F degrees. b. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
April 2011 08 1113 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1113 10-9050 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
c. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 4. Core: Mineral fiberboard. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames up to 5' wide c. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 14 gage frames over 5' wide d. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. Minimum 26 ga; welded in place. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Form and cut metered corners of welded type frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind weld joints to smooth uniform finish. 6. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with 12 gage steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames , Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. D. Interior Door Frames , Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. Reinforce jambs and heads. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; factory-painted finish, color as selected ; factory-installed. 1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 , factory installed. C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100. 1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating. D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard. B. Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding and handling. Chemically treat surfaces. C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
April 2011 08 1113 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1113 10-9050 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80 and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Place UL labels where visible when installation is complete. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Insure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. D. Provide jamb anchors: SDI-100. Weld floor jamb anchors in place. E. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. F. Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware. Refer to section 08710 for hardware requirements. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. Accurately cope and securely weld butt joints of mullions of glazed lights. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish. H. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. I. Fill surface depressions of metal frames and doors with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION
April 2011 08 1113 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1416 10-9050 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. D. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. F. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required , special beveling , special blocking for hardware , factory machining criteria , factory finishing criteria , identify cutouts for glazing. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6x6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. C. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
April 2011 08 1416 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1416 10-9050 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of installation. D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Masonite Corp. www.masonite.com ; Product Flush series Embossed Prefinished Hardboard. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. Interior Doors: 1-3/8 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UBC Standard 7-2-94 ("neutral pressure"); UL labeled without any visible seals when door is open. 3. Embossed Hardboard facing with factory finish to match prehung door frames. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: AHA A135.4, Class 2 - Standard, S2S (smooth two sides) hardboard, composition face, 1/8 inch thick. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. B. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors. 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. 1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. G. Factory Bevel doors.
April 2011 08 1416 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 1416 10-9050 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
H. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. D. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings END OF SECTION
April 2011 08 1416 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 08 3100 10-9050 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SECTION 08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations. Provide in the following locations: 1. Access to fire dampers 2. Concealed items requiring maintenance. 3. As shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access doors. 1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. B. Provide products listed and labeled by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Ceiling Access Doors: 1. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 2.03 ACCESS DOOR UNITS - WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel. 1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel. 2. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet. 3. Size: As indicated. 4. Hardware: a. Hinge, Fire-Rated-Units: 175 degree steel hinges with non-removable pin. b. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin. c. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit.
April 2011 08 3100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 3100 10-9050 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
5. Prime coat with alkyd primer. B. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings: 1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: a. Model #3210-016 manufactured by Milcor. C. Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings: 1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: a. 1 hour fire rating. b. Model # 3218-27 manufactured by Milcor. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION
April 2011 08 3100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 5400 10-9050 COMPOSITE WINDOWS
SECTION 08 5400 - COMPOSITE WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated extruded composite windows with operating sash. B. Factory glazed. C. Operating hardware. D. Insect screens. E. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. C. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM E 1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. F. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; Federal Specifications and Standards. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS C. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional requirements: D. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. 1. Measure performance of units by testing in accordance with ASTM E 330, using test pressure equal to 1.5 times the design wind pressure and 10 second duration of maximum load. E. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. F. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.1 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. G. Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40 percent relative humidity. H. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331. I. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. J. Windows shall be Energy Star Qualified. K. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
April 2011 08 5400 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 5400 10-9050 COMPOSITE WINDOWS
L. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of plastic to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 - DP-50 rated. . E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. Warranty start date at substantial completion.. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Extruded composite Windows 1. Andersen Corporation ; Product Andersen® 100 Series Single-Hung Windows, Andersen® 100 Series Gliding Windows: www.andersenwindows.com. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, wood fiber and thermoplastic polymer composite with integral color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: single hung sash. 2. Configuration: horizontal sliding sash. 3. Color: Color as selected. B. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. 1. Color: to match window frame finish.
April 2011 08 5400 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 5400 10-9050 COMPOSITE WINDOWS
C. Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, glass fiber strands. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: 1. Glass in Exterior Lights: 5/8" high performance Insulating glass, Low E coating with argon fill conforming to ASTM E774-92, level A. Glass units will be secured to the window frame by a silicone ductile bedding compond. Provide safety glazing in locations indicated on the plans. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Automatic locking hardware- locks when sash is closed. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with hot melt adhesive joining at corners and joints, in a rigid jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity. B. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded Fibrex for tight fit into window frame section. C. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit. D. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. E. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view. F. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. G. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. H. Double weatherstrip operable units. I. Factory glaze window units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window units and hardware in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. F. Install operating hardware. G. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 9005. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less.
April 2011 08 5400 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 08 5400 10-9050 COMPOSITE WINDOWS
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E 1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference as specified for laboratory tests. 1. Test one window of each type, as directed by Architect. 2. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense. B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION
April 2011 08 5400 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
SECTION 08 7100 – FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed.
B. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.
C. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 2. 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3. 08210 – Flush Wood Doors 4. 08410 – Aluminum Doors and Frames 5. Division 16 – Electrical
1.2 REFERENCES
A. STANDARDS
1. ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges 2. ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches 3. ANSI A156.3 – Exit Devices 4. ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers 5. ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 6. ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim 7. ANSI A156.7 – Template Hinge Dimensions 8. ANSI A156.8 – Door Controls – Overhead Holders 9. ANSI A156.13 – Mortise Locks and Latches 10. ANSI A156.15 – Closer Holder Release Devices 11. ANSI A156.16 – Auxiliary Hardware 12. ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes 13. NFPA80 – Fire Doors and Windows 14. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
B. CODES
1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code
April 2011 08 7100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
3. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.
B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA
1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information:
a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. c. Door and frame sizes and materials. d. Keying information. e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. h. Fastenings and other pertinent information. i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard.
2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware.
3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner’s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
C. SAMPLES
1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
D. TEMPLATES 1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware.
April 2011 08 7100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
E. ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SYSTEMS
1. Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiring electronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval.
2. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval.
3. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval.
4. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference between supplier, installers and related trades to review materials, procedures and coordinating related work.
5. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a complete engineered system. If alternate electrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing a complete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well as power supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer and electrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and working system.
6. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide ElectroLynx standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Plug connectors shall plug directly into ElectroLynx through-door wiring harnesses, frame wiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies.
F. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items:
a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. c. Manufacturer’s written warranty information. d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SUBSTITUTIONS
1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.
April 2011 08 7100 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years.
2. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project.
3. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at lease one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project’s hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor.
4. Hardware supplier must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein.
C. AUTOMATIC OPERATOR SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
1. Power Operator products shall be furnished a factory trained, certified and direct purchaser of the automatic operator. Supplier to be a current member of the Power Operator preferred installation program and be equipped with servicing the equipment.
1.5 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS
1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated.
2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. MARKING AND PACKAGING
1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care. Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner.
April 2011 08 7100 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier receives material from various manufacturers, sort and clearly mark with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match the approved hardware schedule.
B. DELIVERY
1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct.
2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks.
C. STORAGE
1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner.
1. Cylindrical locksets: Seven (7) years 2. Exit Devices: Five (5) years 3. Door closers: Ten (10) years
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS
1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use.
B. HANGING DEVICES
April 2011 08 7100 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
1. BUTTS AND HINGES
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types: Type McKinney Hager Bommer Type 1 T4A3795 BB1262 BB5024 Type 2 TA2714 BB1279 BB5000 Type 3 TA2314 BB1191 BB5001/BB5002 Type 4 T4A3786 BB1168 BB5004 Type 5 T4A3386 BB1199 BB5005/BB5006
2. Application: 1) Exterior outswinging doors Type 5 x NRP 2) Exterior inswinging doors and vestibule doors Type 5 3) Interior doors with closers Type 2 or 4 4) Interior doors over 36 inches wide Type 4 5) Interior doors 36 inches or less without closer Type 2 6) Provide NRP (non-removable pins) at out-swinging lockable doors.
3. Size: 1) 2-1/4 inch Doors 5 inch by 5 inch 2) 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch 3) 1-3/8 inch Doors 3-1/2 inch by 3-1/2 inch
4. Quantity: 1) 2 - hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. 2) 1 - additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof. 3) 4 - Dutch doors up to 90 inches in height.
5. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12, 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood screws for hinges on wood doors.
C. CYLINDERS AND KEYING
1. CYLINDERS
1. Provide cylinders and keys to match an existing master key system.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Schlage – C Keyway 2) Approved Substitutes: none
2. KEYING
1. All locks and cylinders to be master-keyed or grandmaster-keyed as directed by the owner. Furnish the following key amounts:
1) Three (3) change keys per lock 2) Three (3) grand master keys 3) Six (6) master keys per master level
April 2011 08 7100 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
2. Master keys and all high-security or restricted keyway blanks shall be sealed in tamper-proof packaged boxes when shipped from the factory. The boxes shall be shrink wrapped and imprinted to ensure the integrity of the packaging.
3. KEY CABINET
1. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Telkee 2) Approved Substitutes: Lund
D. LOCKING DEVICES
1. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
1. All locksets for exterior doors shall be ANSI 156.2 Series, Grade 1 certified furnished with standard 2 3/4” backset. Lockset chassis shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel. Locksets shall have solid one-piece, cast levers without plastic inserts. Latchbolt shall have a minimum 1/2” throw and locks shall be non-handed and fully field reversible. All locks shall be provided with strike boxes.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 10 Line 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin CL3300 Series, Schlage ND Series, Yale 5400LN Series
2. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
1. All locksets for interior public area doors shall be ANSI A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 2. Locksets shall have bi-directional lever handles and a minimum 1/2” throw UL listed latchbolt constructed of brass with a hardened steel latchbolt tail. All locksets shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes. All locks shall be provided with strike boxes.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 7 Line 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin CL3900 Series, Schlage AL Series, Yale 5300LN Series
3. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
1. All locksets for doors inside apartment units shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2 usable with 1 3/8” or 1 3/4" thick doors. Locksets shall be supplied with a universal latch adjustable for 2 3/8” or 2 3/4" backsets. Levers shall be zinc based and plated to match required finishes. All locks shall be provided with strike boxes.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent 3 Line
April 2011 08 7100 - 7 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin CL3700 Series; Schlage F Series, Yale Residential
4. INTERCONNECTED CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
1. All locksets for unit entry doors shall be ANSI A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 2. Locksets shall have bi-directional lever handles and a minimum 1/2” throw UL listed latchbolt constructed of brass with a hardened steel latchbolt tail. All locksets shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes. All locks shall be provided with strike boxes.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 7500 Line 2) Approved Substitutes: Schlage S200 Series, Yale YH Collection
E. ELECTRIC STRIKES
1. STANDARD STRIKES
1. All electric strikes shall meet BHMA standard 501, grade 1 and be UL Listed for Burglary Resistance, category 1034. Strikes shall be all stainless steel construction for corrosion resistance, strength and durability. Strikes shall have been tested to withstand a forcing strength of a minimum 2400 lbs. before releasing and perform with a minimum of one million cycles of operation. Strikes shall be 24VDC fail safe or fail secure as specified
1) Specified Manufacturers: Folger Adams 700 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: HES 1006 Series, Von Duprin 6200 Series
F. EXIT DEVICES
1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES
1. All exit devices shall be certified to meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 requirements and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0.072” thick. Push rails shall be constructed of 0.062” thick material. Painted or anodized aluminum shall not be considered heavy duty and are not acceptable. Hex key dogging shall be standard for all life safety panic hardware. Lever trim shall be available in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 80 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ED4000/ED5000 Series, Von Duprin 35A/98 Series, Yale 7100/7200 Series
G. DOOR CLOSERS
1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – HEAVY DUTY
1. All closers for exterior doors shall be ANSI/BHMA 156.4 certified and have non- ferrous covers, aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves
April 2011 08 7100 - 8 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be constructed with a one-piece body. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 7500 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: LCN 4040 Series, Sargent 351 Series, Yale 4400 Series
2. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – STANDARD DUTY
1. All closers for interior public area doors shall be ANSI/BHMA 156.4 certified and have non-ferrous covers, aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be constructed with a one-piece body. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 8500 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: LCN 1460 Series, Sargent 1431 Series, Yale 3500 Series
3. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – STANDARD DUTY
1. All closers for interior non-public area doors shall be ANSI/BHMA 156.4 certified and have non-ferrous covers, aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be constructed with a one-piece body. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 1601BF Series 2) Approved Substitutes: LCN 1071 Series, Sargent 1131 Series, Yale 51 Series
4. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS – ELECTROMECHANICAL
1. Low energy door operators shall satisfy all code requirements set forth in ANSI/BHMA standard A156.19 and meet UL, C-UL, UL10C and UL10B standards for use on fire doors. Units shall have adjustments for door closing
April 2011 08 7100 - 9 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
force and backcheck, motor assist from 0 to 30 seconds, must have method for electric lock delay, and door hold open delay up to 30 seconds. Operator units shall provide conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated by an initiating device with door closer assembly having adjustable spring size, backcheck valve, sweep valve, latch valve, speed control valve, and pressure adjustment valve to control door closing. Units shall have an obstruction detector to prevent a closed door from opening or a door that is fully opened from closing and shall have a hold-open toggle input to allow remote activation for indefinite hold open; door shall close the second time the input is activated. Operators shall have a SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices. All controlling operator switches shall be of radio-frequency design and not hard-wired. Installer shall be a participating member with ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions program as a Power Operator Preferred Installer “POPI” program.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 5900 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Sargent X-In Series
H. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES
1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less full width of door, or as specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Rockwood 2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Trimco
I. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS
1. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Rockwood 2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Trimco
2. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS
1. Where specified, overhead stops as shown in the hardware sets are to be provided. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson 2) Approved Substitutes: Sargent, ABH
J. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as required to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
April 2011 08 7100 - 10 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
2. Provide threshold units not less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA.)
1. Specified Manufacturers: Pemko 2. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Zero
K. SILENCERS
1. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Rockwood 608 for all new interior hollow metal frames, two (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame up to 7’6” and one additional for every 30” in door height, and Rockwood 609 for all wood frames.
2.3 FINISHES
A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. Where specified provide factory applied Silver Ion antimicrobial finish. Field or shop applied coatings are not acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.)
2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.”
April 2011 08 7100 - 11 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experienced hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.
C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
E. All Power Operator products shall be installed by a factory trained, certified and direct purchaser of the automatic operator by the specified manufacturer. The installer is a current member of the manufacturer’s preferred installation program and has a service center for stocking of parts and equipped to be handle service calls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant duly certified by the Door and Hardware Industry prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in
April 2011 08 7100 - 12 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. DS – Door Scope 2. FA – Folger Adam 3. MC – McKinney 4. NO – Norton 5. PE – Pemko 6. RO – Rockwood 7. RX – Rixson 8. SA – Sargent
Set #01 3 Hinges T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" x NRP US4 MC 1 Rim Exit Device (nightlatch) 43-SC-8844 ETP US4 SA 1 Closer/Stop CPS-7500 (Full Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Threshold 2005 AT PE 1 Set Weatherstrip 303 GS PE 1 Sweep 315 GN PE
Set #02 3 Hinges T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" x NRP US4 MC 1 Rim Exit Device (exit only) 43-8810 US4 SA 1 Closer/Stop CPS-7500 (Full Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Threshold 2005 AT PE 1 Set Weatherstrip 303 GS PE 1 Sweep 315 GN PE
Set #03 3 Hinges T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" x NRP US4 MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC-10G04 LP US4 SA 1 Closer/Stop CPS-7500 (Full Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Threshold 271 A PE 1 Set Weatherstrip 303 GS PE 1 Sweep 315 GN PE 1 Latch Protector 320CL US32D RO
Set #04 3 Hinges T4A3386 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" x NRP US4 MC 1 Passage Latchset 10U15 LP US4 SA 1 Electric Strike 712-24D 606 FA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9 Series 606E RX 1 Automatic Operator 5930 X-in 690 NO 1 Actuator Switch (wall) 685 NO 1 Actuator Switch (jamb) 662 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO
April 2011 08 7100 - 13 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
1 Threshold 2005 AT PE 1 Set Weatherstrip 303 GS PE 1 Sweep 315 GN PE Note: Actuator switch either side releases the electric strike, then activates the operator.
Set #05 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Rim Exit Device (passage) 43-8815 ETP US4 SA 1 Closer 8501 (Full Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE
Set #06 3 Hinges T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" x NRP US4 MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC-10G04 LP US4 SA 1 Electric Strike 712-24D 606 FA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9 Series 606E RX 1 Automatic Operator 5930 X-in 690 NO 1 Actuator Switch (jamb) 662 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE 1 Access Control Reader by Security Contractor Notes: Inside actuator switch releases the electric strike and then activates the operator. Access control system outside releases the electric strike and then activates the operator.
Set #07 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Storeroom Lockset 86-SC-7G04 LP US4 SA 1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US4 RO 1 Threshold 271 A PE 1 Gasketing S88 C PE 1 Sweep 18061 GNB PE
Set #08 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Classroom Lockset SC-7G37 LP US4 SA 1 Closer 8501 (Full Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE
Set #09 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Privacy Lockset 7U65 LP US4 SA
April 2011 08 7100 - 14 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE
Set #10 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Passage Latchset 7U15 LP US4 SA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10 Series 606E RX 1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE
Set #11 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Classroom Lockset SC-7G37 LP US4 SA 1 Wall Stop 409 US4 RO
Set #12 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC-7G04 LP US4 SA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10 Series 606E RX 1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Kickplate K1050 - 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US4 RO 1 Threshold 271 A PE 1 Gasketing S88 C PE 1 Sweep 18061 GNB PE
Set #13 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Interconnected Lockset SC-75G15 KP US4 SA 1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Door Stop 519 US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE 1 Door Scope DS/1000 FB (@ 60” AFF) Brass OT
Set #14 3 Hinges by the pre-hung door manufacturer US4 1 Privacy Lockset 3U65 OB US4 SA 1 Door Stop 519 US4 RO
Set #15 3 Hinges by the pre-hung door manufacturer US4 1 Passage Latchset 3U15 OB US4 SA 1 Door Stop 519 US4 RO
Set #16 2 Wire Pull 853 US4 RO 1 Bi-fold Door Track & Hardware HF4/100A PE
April 2011 08 7100 - 15 Wallace Place Apartments 08 7100 10-9050 FINISH HARDWARE
Set #17 2 Wire Pull 853 US4 RO 1 Bi-fold Door Track & Hardware HF4/100A PE
Set #18 3 Hinges TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US4 MC 1 Interconnected Lockset SC-75G15 KP US4 SA 1 Closer 1601BF P (Slim Cover) 696 NO 1 Door Stop 519 US4 RO 1 Gasketing S88 C PE 1 Viewer 622 (@ 60” AFF) BRS RO 1 Door Scope DS/1000 FB (@ 48” AFF) Brass DS
End of Section 08 7100
April 2011 08 7100 - 16 Wallace Place Apartments 08 8000 10-9050 GLAZING
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. D. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. E. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. F. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. G. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. H. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America. I. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
April 2011 08 8000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 08 8000 10-9050 GLAZING
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG-3 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in exterior doors. b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard and inboard lites. 3. Tint: Clear. B. Type S-1 - Single Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Laminated float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Glazing Method: Interior wet method, glazing compound. C. Type S-2 - Fire-Rated Safety Glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in fire doors. b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire rating. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Type: Glass-ceramic safety glazing. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com. 2. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 3. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgglazing.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C 1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C 1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch thick, minimum.
April 2011 08 8000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 08 8000 10-9050 GLAZING
3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tong-less horizontal method. 4. Manufacturers: a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com. b. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. c. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film. 1. 20-Minute Fire Doors: Hose stream test is not required. 2. Products: a. SCHOTT North America Inc; Pyran Platinum L (laminated) Fire Rated Ceramic Glass. b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. 4. Tremco Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. Tremco "Mono" C. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. Sonolastic 2 part as manufactured by Sonneborne D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 1. Structural Sealant: Dow Corning "795" 2. Weather Seal: Dow Corning 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness,. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; Polyshim II as manufactured by Tremco. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
April 2011 08 8000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 08 8000 10-9050 GLAZING
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate all pieces which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. D. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be preformed, and notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of all conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 3.02 JOB REQUIREMENTS A. Provide watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass. Each installation shall withstand normal tempeture changes, wind loading, impact loading for operating sash and doors without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight or airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defective work. B. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation. C. Glazing channel dimensions shown provide for a minimum bite on the glass, minimum clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Contractor responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within tolerances specified and dimensions established. D. Comply with combined requirements of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative direct otherwise. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry, immediately before glazing. B. Remove coatings which do not have a firm bond to the substrate. C. Remove Lacquer from metal surfaces whenever elastomeric sealants are used. D. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. E. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. F. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. G. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install glass with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and roller marks B. Glazing shall be set with equal bearing for entire width. C. Voids and Filler rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and head. Do not leave voids in the sill channels except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness, and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass which is chemically strengthened, tempered, or heat strengthened. E. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surface. F. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
April 2011 08 8000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 08 8000 10-9050 GLAZING
G. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurized the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when subject to dynamic movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesive, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead. H. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.05 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with manufacturer's approved sealant. B. Apply heel bead of manufacturer's approved sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch below sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.06 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.07 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight line. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces, promptly after installation and eliminate stains and discoloration. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean and polish glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.09 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during the construction period END OF SECTION
April 2011 08 8000 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 09 2116 10-9050 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal channel ceiling framing. B. Fire rated area separation walls. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum wallboard. E. Joint treatment and accessories. F. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. B. ASTM C 557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. C. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. D. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. E. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. F. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. H. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. I. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. J. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. K. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association. L. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. C. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with GA-214 and GA-216. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
April 2011 09 2116 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 2116 10-9050 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. 2. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 3. Furring: As indicated on the drawings B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated. 2. Edges: Tapered. D. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated. 1. Special Fire Resistant Type: "Type C"; meeting and exceeding requirements of Type X; UL or WH rated. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated. E. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. E. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; containing fine aggregate. 1. Product: Sheetrock Brand Wall and Ceiling Texture- Orange Peel Finish Texture manufactured by USG. F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. G. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood: ASTM C 557. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
April 2011 09 2116 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 2116 10-9050 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as permitted by standard. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. B. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. C. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Spacing: As indicated. D. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. E. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. F. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets, wood frame openings, and toilet accessories. Comply with Section 06 1054 for wood blocking. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. 3.04 BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-216 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Adhesive application. E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows:
April 2011 09 2116 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 09 2116 10-9050 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish. 3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.07 TEXTURE FINISH A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 2116 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 09 3000 10-9050 TILE
SECTION 09 3000 - TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium). 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. 10. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 11. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 12. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. 13. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. 14. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Selection samples: Sample of actual tile for selection. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.
April 2011 09 3000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 3000 10-9050 TILE
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows: 1. Quarry Textures manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equivalent product. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 6 inch square. 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 7. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range. 8. Trim Units: Matching cove base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 2.03 GROUT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Bonsal Co: www.bonsal.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Mapie. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
April 2011 09 3000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 3000 10-9050 TILE
D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 3000 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 09 5100 10-9050 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 6 inches long, of suspension system main runner. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 10 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit and suspension grid for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. USG: www.usg.com. Product: Fifth Avenue 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. C. Acoustical Panels: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type IV, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches.
April 2011 09 5100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 5100 10-9050 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Wet felted. 4. Light Reflectance: 83 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5. NRC Range: 0.45 to 0.55, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 30, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 7. Surface Color: White. 8. Product: Fifth Avenue by USG. 9. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type Exposed Grid. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Finish: White. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Gypsum Board: Fire rated type; 5/8 inch thick, ends and edges square, paper faced. D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 9005. E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Produce finished ceiling of true lines and levels free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or lay-in panels. C. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. D. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.
April 2011 09 5100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 5100 10-9050 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant. 2. Use longest practical lengths. 3. Miter corners. L. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. C. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace any part which is damaged or faulty. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 5100 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 09 6500 10-9050 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. D. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. D. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F 710. E. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. B. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. C. Protect adhesives from freezing. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. C. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 10 sq ft of flooring, 20 lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS
April 2011 09 6500 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6500 10-9050 RESILIENT FLOORING
2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Transparent or translucent vinyl wear layer over interlayer and backing, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1303, Type I, with Class A fibrous backing. 2. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch minimum. 3. Total Thickness: 0.080 inch minimum. 4. Sheet Width: 144 inch minimum. 5. Pattern: Architect to select from Arizona Slate, Limestone Walk, Sandhurst, and Rhapsody. 6. Provide 10 year wear warranty. 7. Manufacturers: a. Mannington Commercial ; Product Insight Plus. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 4 inch except in public restrooms which shall be 6" in height. 3. Thickness: 0.080 inch thick. 4. Finish: Matte. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops. 8. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com. b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. c. Armstrong: www.armstrong.com d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Metal. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Heavy Duty Vinyl Transition Strips: Transition strips at termination of dissimilar floor materials. 1. Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Products EGXXH (carpet/sheet vinyl): www.johnsonite.com 2. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
April 2011 09 6500 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6500 10-9050 RESILIENT FLOORING
E. Verify that concrete sub-floor and self leveling underlayment surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 SHEET FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. E. Seams are prohibited in bathrooms and custodial closets. F. Double cut sheet at seams. G. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated. H. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. After installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. J. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap strip. K. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
April 2011 09 6500 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6500 10-9050 RESILIENT FLOORING
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. E. Install base and trim accessories to minimize joints. End pieces less than 12" will not be accepted. F. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 6500 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6800 10-9050 CARPETING
SECTION 09 6800 - CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, direct-glued. B. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. C. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute. D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two samples 8x8 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material specified. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum three years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 72 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Upon completion of the work, turn over all useable carpet, in widths of less than 12 feet to the owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet: 1. J & J Industries, Inc: www.jjindustries.com. 2.02 CARPET A. Carpet Type 1: Quick Fix Broadloam 2826 with TitanBac Plus Backing by J& J Commercial, conforming to the following criteria: 1. Dye Method: Solution Dyed 2. Color: As selected from manufacturers full range of colors. 3. Roll Width: 12 ft.
April 2011 09 6800 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6800 10-9050 CARPETING
4. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3.0 Kv at 20 percent R.H. 5. Carpet shall be provided in all apartment units. 6. Pile Weight: 26 oz/sq yd. B. Carpet Type 2: Rococo Broadloom 1466 with TitanBac Plus backing by J&J Commercial 1. Dye Method: Solution Dyed/Yarn Dyed 2. Color: as selected. 3. Roll Width: 12 feet 4. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3.0 K. 5. Pile Weight: Dial up to 28oz/sq yd. 6. This carpet shall be provided in all common spaces including corridor. C. Contractor is responsible for including appropriate yardage for pattern matches. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Mounting: Direct Glue Down; Waterproof, strippable adhesive. C. Termination strips and transition strips: Heavy duty vinyl, color as selected. D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. E. Lay out carpet: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. 6. Lay carpet in adjacent areas in the same direction
April 2011 09 6800 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 6800 10-9050 CARPETING
F. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. G. Unsatisfactory work: Work installed not in accord with manufacturer's instructions, or in a manner unacceptable to the Architect/Engineer, will be deemed unsatisfactory and may require removal and relaying at the contractor's expense. H. No splices in areas less than 12 x 12 ft. One splice per 12 running feet in areas greater than 12x12. 3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET A. Double cut carpet seams , with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately. B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. Apply seam glue so that it will be over or as high as primary backing. D. Roll with appropriate roller, minimum 100 pound roller, for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive from carpet, floor and wall surfaces without damage. B. Upon completion of carpet work, restrict all traffic in finished areas to normal foot traffic for a minimum of two days. C. Provide and maintain proper protection. Vacuum clean all carpet prior to placing protection. Place protection continuously with all seams lapped a minimum of six inches and taped. Maintain in good condition until directed D. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, completely remove all protection and tape, and legally dispose of off site. Removal will be required no later than Project Acceptance. E. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces with an upright beater bar or upright stiff nylon brush type vacuum cleaner. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 6800 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 3. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. E. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. B. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
April 2011 09 9000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. B. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 3. Sherwin-Williams Co: www.sherwin-williams.com C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
April 2011 09 9000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. B. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. C. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. D. Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint WI-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. B. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain: 1. One coat of stain; Match prefinished door color. 2. One coat sealer. 3. Satin: Two coats of varnish. C. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. D. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. E. Paint MgI-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. F. Paint CI-OP-3Af - Concrete/Masonry, Alkyd Floor Enamel, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkali resistant primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd floor enamel. G. Paint GI-OP-3E - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of catalyzed epoxy primer enamel; Public Restrooms. H. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of USG "Sheet Rock First Coat" or Gold Bond "Drywall Primer", wallboard primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; Interior Walls and Unit Ceilings. 3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; Interior Common Area Ceilings. I. Paint FI-OP-3A - Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
April 2011 09 9000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 5. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection 1. Furnish sufficient drop clothes, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. D. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. I. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. J. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. K. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. L. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. M. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. N. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.
April 2011 09 9000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
O. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. P. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. Q. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. R. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. S. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. T. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. U. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. V. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
April 2011 09 9000 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 09 9000 10-9050 PAINTING AND COATING
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.06 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.07 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 3.08 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. B. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. C. Wood Doors: Factory-finished. D. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, semi-gloss; finish all surfaces, including concealed surfaces, before installation. 2. Interior: MI-OP-3L, semi-gloss; finish all surfaces, including concealed surfaces, before installation. E. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: MgE-OP-3A 2. Interior: MgI-OP-3A F. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Finish the following items: a. Exposed surfaces of lintels. b. Elevator pit ladders. c. Mechanical equipment. d. Electrical equipment. G. Pipe and Duct Insulation Jackets: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; FI-OP-2A, flat. 3.09 SCHEDULE - COLORS A. Contractor Note: Owner has the option to chose different colors for the walls, ceiling, doors, frames, and trim work of each room at no extra charge to the contract sum except unit, mechanical and storage room ceilings and walls, shall be sprayed the same color and finish. END OF SECTION
April 2011 09 9000 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 10 1440 10-9050 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 1440 - INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior signage as indicated in the attached signage schedule: 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10441 - Exterior Signage. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG); U.S. Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature. C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior sign. D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified including method of attachment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1 and ADAAG. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com:Product numbers as indicated on the attached signage schedule. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 INTERIOR SIGNS A. PVC Interior Signs 1. Finish Collection: Elements. 2. Grade II Braille 3. Sign Sizes: a. See attached schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation. B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards.
April 2011 10 1440 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 1440 10-9050 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system. B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer. D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.04 INTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the list of interior signs required for the project as attached to this Section. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 1440 - 2 Milestone 9050 Interior Signage Schedule Manufacture: InPro Corporation Sign Collection: Design: Sydney I
All Signs a Quantity of 1 unless otherwise noted
S120 Identification Signs with Grade 2 Braille Size: 4" x 4" Unit 101 Unit 102 Unit 103 Unit 104 Unit 105 Unit 106 Unit 107 Unit 108 Unit 109
Size: 4" x 8" Community Room 100 Reception 111 Office 112 Office 113 Mechanical 114 Laundry 117 Storage 118 Mechanical 119
S320 Regulatory sign (ADA) Compliant Size: 8" x 8" Pictogram Men's Man / Wheelchair Women's Woman / Wheelchair
S210 Wall Mount Directional Size: 12" x 12" Arrow Direction, Arrow Style: C1 Community Room Up Units 101-104 Left Units 105-109 Right Laundry & Office 113 Right
Wallace Place Apartments 10 1441 10-9050 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 1441 - EXTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specialty parking signage B. Exterior Building Sign as located on landscaping plan. C. Signs made of individual plastic letters for building address number signage. See exterior elevation. D. Cash allowance for signs. 1.02 ALLOWANCES A. See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section. 1. Exterior Building Sign Allowance of $7000 for purchase and delivery of Exterior Building Sign; installation is included in this section and is part of the Contract Sum 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Handicap Signs: 1. Lynn Sign Co.. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Individual Graphics 1. Gemini, Inc. www. signletters.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL SIGNS A. Metal, Handicap Signs: painted metal signs on steel angle post by Lynn Sign Co. or approved equal. Signs which have peel off symbols will not be accepted. 1. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2.03 INDIVIDUAL GRAPHICS A. Material: Gemini, Inc. Laser Cut solid color acrylic plastic: 1. Height: 4 inches. B. Character Style: 1. Character Color: to be selected. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 2.04 ACCESSORIES
April 2011 10 1441 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 1441 10-9050 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Fasteners: Concealed metal fasteners, non-corrosive to sign material or mounting surface. B. Anchors and Inserts: Non Ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized for exterior installations and where required for corrosion resistance. Toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors. Inserts for concrete or masonry work. C. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Non Fading, colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, recommended by manufacturers. 2.05 FINISHING A. Color as indicated or, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard. B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for polished aluminum; use manufacturers clear organic coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations as directed. C. Install signs level, plumb and at the appropriate hight. D. Set Posts in Concrete E. Metal Letters: 1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer and heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes and fasteners. 2. Flush mount letters with backs in contact with wall surface 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Building Sign. B. Parking Signage (see drawings). C. Accessible entrance pictorial signage - building mount. D. Building Address Letters (See Exterior Elevations) END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 1441 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 2601 10-9050 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
SECTION 10 2601 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. B. Rigid Vinyl Wall Covering 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements. C. Samples: Color Selection Chain. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Corner Guards: 1. InPro Corporation; Product 150 series corner guards and Sanparrel Rigid Vinyl Sheet: www.inprocorp.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Rigid Vinyl Wallcovering - Surface mounted: High Imact Vinyl. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Height: As indicated on drawings (Extend below wall base.) 4. Provide and install top cap, inside corners, and divider bars. B. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum full height retainer and integral impact absorbing device. 1. Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Size: 3 inches. 4. Corner: Square. 5. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Length: 48" high. 7. Preformed end caps. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION
April 2011 10 2601 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 2601 10-9050 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. B. Maintain minimum 70 deg. F air tempeture for 3 days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation. C. Install rigid vinyl wall covering horizontally; 8'-0" lengths. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Install corner guards on all outside corners in handicap units. B. Install corner guards on all outside corners in all common areas including lobbies and cooridors. C. Install Rigid Vinyl Wallcovering on all corridor and lobby walls as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 2601 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 2800 10-9050 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. C. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 2. Basco Inc.: www.bascoinc.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID A-A-3002. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized. E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets. 1. Type 1: Product: 505 manufactured by Bradley Corp. or Product: 8010 manufactured by American Specialties, Inc.
April 2011 10 2800 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 2800 10-9050 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
2. Type 2: Product: 5402 manufactured by Bradley Corp or Product: 0030 manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. B. Combination towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Surface mounted, stainless steel; seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors. 1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl. 2. Towel dispenser capacity: minimum 400 C-fold. 3. Waste receptacle capacity: 5.3 gallons. 4. Product: 2251-10 manufactured by Bradley Corp or Product: 0467-2 manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Minimum Capacity: 40 ounces. 2. Product: Model #6562 manufactured by Bradley Corp or Product 0347 manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror. 1. Size: as indicated on drawings and schedule below. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Product: Model 812 manufactured by Bradley Corp or Product: 3800 manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. 2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Towel Bar: Die Cast, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, bright polished finish. 1. Length: as indicated on the drawings. 2. Product: Model # 7930 manufactured by Basco Inc or Product: 0760-Z manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. B. Robe Hook: Stainless steel; rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, bright polished finish. 1. Product: Model #735 manufactured by Basco Inc. or Product: 0745-Z manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. C. Single Robe Hook to be used as a towel hook: Stainless steel; rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, bright polished finish. 1. Product: Model #719 manufactured by Basco Inc. or Product 0740-Z manufactured by American Specialties, Inc. 2.06 RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORIES A. Surface Mounted Medicine Cabinet Type 1 (Units Mirror): One-piece construction of heavy-gauge steel with factory-applied, gloss white, baked enamel finish, surface-mounted, frameless mirror frame. 1. Shelves: Adjustable, aluminum or glass; provide not less than 3 shelves. 2. Product Type 1: Model# SR331PE-W Medicine Cabinet manufactured by Basco Inc. 3. Product Type 2: Model# FM331PE-W Recessed medicine Cabinet for unit AH manufactured by Basco Inc. 2.07 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. 1. Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front.
April 2011 10 2800 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 2800 10-9050 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
2. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 3. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders/hooks. 4. Product: 9933 manufactured by Bradley Corp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Provide solid wood blocking behind grab bars, shower rod, towel bars, etc. C. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: 1. Bottom of Mirrors: Maximum 40" above finished floor. 2. Grab Bars at Barrier-Free Stalls: 36" above finished floor. 3. Mount other fixtures in public areas: dispensers at 48" max above finished floor. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Note all shower accessories to be provided by the plumbing contractor including the following: Shower cutain, Curtain Rod, Vinyl flexible dam, grab bars in all units. In Unit AH a folding shower seat will also be required. B. Unit Type"A": 1. 1 - Type 1 Toilet paper dispenser per unit 2. 1 - 30" towel bar per unit 3. 1 - Towel hook per unit 4. 1 - Double prong robe hook per unit 5. 1 - Surface Mounted Medicine Cabinet per unit 6. 1 - 36" grab bar per unit 7. 1 - 42" grab bar per unit C. Unite Type "AH" 1. 1 - Type 1 Toilet paper dispenser per unit 2. 1 - 30" towel bar per unit 3. 1 - Towel hook per unit 4. 1 - Double prong robe hook per unit 5. 1 - Fixed mirror 18" x 36" per unit 6. 1 - Recessed Medicine cabinet per unit 7. 1 - 36" grab bar per unit 8. 1 - 42" grab bar per unit D. Public Restrooms -Men's and Women's 1. 1- Type 2 toilet paper dispenser per restroom 2. 1 - Soap Dispenser per restroom 3. 1 - Fixed mirror 18" x 36" per restroom 4. 1 - Combination Towel Dispenser/Trash receptacle per restroom 5. 1 - 36" grab bar per restroom 6. 1 - 42" grab bar per restroom END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 2800 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 10 4400 10-9050 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. C. USCG Approved. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class A:B:C. 2. Size 10. 3. Finish: Epoxy finish. 4. Product: Cosmic 10E as manufactured by JL Industries 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. For use in fire rated walls & meeting ADA Guidelines
April 2011 10 4400 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 4400 10-9050 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim: Flat, 3 inch wide face. C. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. E. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. F. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. G. Product: Ambassador Fire FX Model - 1017 F10 with Flush pull handles. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated. B. Cabinet Signage: FIRE. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 27 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 4400 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5100 10-9050 WIRE MESH LOCKERS
SECTION 10 5100 - WIRE MESH LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Welded Wire Mesh Storage Locker units with hinged doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: 1. WireCrafters, LLC; www.wirecrafters.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wire Mesh panels: Steel angle frames with wire mesh securely welded in place; factory drilled holes for fasteners. 1. Wire Mesh: 10 gauge, 0.135 inch steel wire welded into 2 by 2 inch square mesh. 2. Door frames: 1-1/4" by 1-1/4" inch by 13 ga. coled rolled steel angle. 3. Wall frames: 1-1/4" by 1-1/4" inch by 13 ga. coled rolled steel angle on three sides. 4. Doors: Factory prehung - 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inch spun pin hinges welded in place; padlock hasp. B. Dividers and bottoms: 16 gauge galvanized steel sheet, formed to provide extra strength and rigidity. 1. Dividers: anchor to supports bolted to wall panels at 45 inches above floor. 2.03 LOCKER UNITS A. Factory Assembled modular sized door and divider panels bolted together, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners; interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of components. B. Width: 36 inches. C. Depth: 36 inches. D. Height: 90 inches. E. Configuration: single tier. F. Top: provide welded mesh tops securely fastened to locker. G. Provide backs; 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel. H. Provide formed steel sheet bottoms. I. Finish: Electrostatic sprayed enamel, in manufacturer's standard color. J. Provide appropriate hardware for fastening panels together and anchoring in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. 3.02 INSTALLATION
April 2011 10 5100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5100 10-9050 WIRE MESH LOCKERS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square anchored to floor and to other structural members where indicated. C. Place and secure on prepared base. D. Install accessories. E. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 5100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5520 10-9050 MAIL BOXES
SECTION 10 5520 - MAIL BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grouped mail boxes located indoors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for specified products. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of mail boxes, wall cuts, and interface with other products. Show engraved numbering layout. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements and U.S. Postal Service Requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with United States Postal Service Regulations. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. C. Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Auth-Florence Manufacturing Company; 591 Mitchell Road, Glendale Heights, IL 60139; ASD. Tel: (630) 545-1784, Tel: (800) 275-1747, Fax: (630) 545-1896. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Provide all mail boxes from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MAIL BOXES A. Mail Boxes: USPS approved, recessed, heavy gage extruded aluminum and 300 series stainless steel components. 1. Model: Front Loading, Series 4C Horizontal - Suite D. Two Model 4CDT2-5. 2. Total Number of Units: 9 tenant boxes, 1 office box, and 2 parcel boxes. 3. Unit Configuration as shown on enlarged interior elevation drawing. 4. Compartment Depth: 15-1/2 inches. 5. Locks: USPS-1172 910A lock with 3 keys. 6. Box Identification: Engraved numbers with black fill. Verify mailbox numbering and order with owner prior to ordering 7. Finish: Architect to select from manufacturer's full line of standard powder coat finishes. 8. Key keeper box mounted in the vestibule. Fully recessed and designed to accept keyed cylinder by U.S. Postal Department. Loose Key type. 9. Matching snap-on trim. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings in wall are correctly located, aligned, and sized for mail boxes. B. Installer's Examination: 1. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed; submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect.
April 2011 10 5520 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5520 10-9050 MAIL BOXES
3. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mail boxes in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Align, plumb, and level; anchor in accordance with requirements. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and locks to operate correctly. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect finishes from damage by subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 5520 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5623 10-9050 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
SECTION 10 5623 - WIRE STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving and attachment to substrates. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. C. Store flat to prevent warpage and bending. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire Storage Shelving: 1. ClosetMaid Corporation: www.closetmaid.com. 2. RubberMaid Closet and Organization Products: www.rubbermaidcloset.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SHELVING APPLICATIONS A. Shelf Depth: 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Bedroom Closets: 1. Wall-to-wall shelf with free sliding hanger rod. C. Coat Closets: 1. Wall-to-wall shelf with free sliding hanger rod. D. Linen Storage Closets: 1. Wall-to-wall storage shelves, close-mesh cross wire spacing, stacked at 13 inch vertically, not less than 16 inch deep. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and warping. 1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi resistance welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions, with wires trimmed smooth. 2. Coating: PVC or epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces. 3. PVC Coating: 9 to 11 mils thick. 4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick. 5. Close-Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1/2 inch. 6. Free-Sliding Hanging Rod: Integral hanging rod that permits uninterrupted sliding of hangers the full width of the shelf.
April 2011 10 5623 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 10 5623 10-9050 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
B. Wall-Mounted Standards: Vertically slotted channel standards with double-tab cantilever brackets to suit shelving; factory finished to match shelving. C. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving. D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelf units, and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware. C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level. B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires. C. Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate support braces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Mounting Heights: 1. Single Hanging Rod Units: Install shelf at max. 48 inches above floor (Accessible Units). 2. Single Hanging Rod Units: Install shef at 54 inches above floor (Standard Units) 3. Other Shelves: See drawings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean soiled surfaces after installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage. B. Clean soiled surfaces after installation. C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner that eliminates evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION
April 2011 10 5623 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 11 3100 10-9050 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
SECTION 11 3100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. B. Product nomenclature may change from the manufacturer before project start date. Contractor responsible to meet criteria established by original products specified. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B. Refrigerator Standard Unit: Free-standing, top-mounted freezer, frost-free. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Features: Include glass shelves and light in freezer compartment. 4. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel , color white. 5. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product GTH18IBX: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Refrigerator Accessible Units and Community Room: Free-standing, side-by-side, frost-free. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 25.25 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant. 3. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color white. 4. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product GSH22JFXWW: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Range Standard Units: Electric, free-standing, with coil elements with chrome drip bowls. 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition. 3. Elements: 4. 4. Controls: Solid state electronic, front mounted. 5. Features: Include storage drawer, oven door window, broiler pan and grid, and oven light.
April 2011 11 3100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 11 3100 10-9050 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
6. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel , color white. 7. Backgaurd Kit: a. Broan; Product SP300108 8. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product JBP15DMWW: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Range Accessible Units: Electric, Drop-In, with coil elements and chrome drip bowls 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Oven: Self-cleaning. 3. Elements: 4. 4. Controls: Electronic, front mounted. 5. Features: Oven door window, broiler pan and grid, oven interior light. 6. Finish: White on white 7. Backgaurd Kit: a. Broan; Product SP300108 8. Electric, Drop-In Range: a. GE Appliances; Product #JDP39DNWW: www.geappliances.com. F. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood. 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Fan: Two- speed, 150 cfm 3. Exhaust: Recirculating. 4. Features: Include cooktop light and removable grease filter. 5. Finish: Painted steel , color white. 6. Accessories: Wall Shield, 30" W x 24" H White, by range hood manufacturer. Such as Broan SP300108. 7. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product JN327HWW: www.geappliances.com. b. Broan; Product #413001: www.broan.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G. Bathroom Exhaust Fan: Refer to the Mechanical Plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. C. Leave in clean condition and ready for operation. END OF SECTION
April 2011 11 3100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 12 2113 10-9050 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
SECTION 12 2113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 3 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, wand type and color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide ten additional slats. C. Provide two additional complete blind assemblies of each size. D. Provide 2 extra control wands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract; Product 0.: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: 1 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.006 inch. 3. Color: As selected. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.
April 2011 12 2113 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 12 2113 10-9050 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats 1. Color: Same as slats . E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. 1. Removable type. 2. ADA compliant 3. Length of window opening height less 3 inches. H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. J. For windows more than 2 sections wide, divide length of blind into separate sections; one per window section. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. C. Place intermediate head supports at 18 inch on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Provide blinds for all exterior windows located in units. B. Provide blinds for all windows located in the community room, exterior. C. Provide blinds for all windows located in the offices, reception, and laundry room, exterior. END OF SECTION
April 2011 12 2113 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 12 3530 10-9050 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
SECTION 12 3530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen cabinets. B. Casework hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 3600 - Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, construction details, and joint details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, scale plans, elevations, clearances required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances. D. Submit 2 sets of samples of available finishes for selection included as part of the interior color selection package. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of experience. C. Do not deliver cabinets until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or, in areas with similar ambient conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Residential Casework: 1. Grandview Cabinets ; Product Piedmont 2. Smart Cabinets; Product Dover. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet Construction: Cabinet ends, tops, and bottoms are made of 1/2" thick industrial grade particle board with a laminate resistent to water and most household chemicals. B. Countertops: As specified in Section 12 3600. C. All cabinets in accessible units to have adjustable roll out trays. D. Toe space 4"min except at accessible cabinets which have a 8" toe space. E. Shelving: 5/8" Premium particle board with front edge smooth. F. Face Frames: Construction of kiln dried hardwood. G. Doors: Five piece hardwood square frame door with plywood panels in rabbet. Profile: back beveled. H. Drawer Fronts: 3/4" solid kiln dried hardwood. Profile: back beveled. I. Provide finished end panels, toe kicks and all exposed areas. J. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. K. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
April 2011 12 3530 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 12 3530 10-9050 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
2.03 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls: Finish to match door hardware wire pulls, 4 inches wide. B. Drawer Slides: Side mount 75lb load capacity epoxy coated, self-closing. C. Hinges: self-closing, 110 degree opening concealed hinges. D. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Nylon track with roller bearing followers. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate. C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on adjacent units for rigidity. D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, appliances, and fixtures and fittings. Prime paint contact surfaces of cut edges. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of support framing. B. Field measurements: Verify sizes and shapes of cabinets by field measurements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Close ends of units, back splashes, shelves and bases. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to hang plumb and function smoothly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. B. Restore damaged finishes. END OF SECTION
April 2011 12 3530 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 12 3600 10-9050 COUNTERTOPS
SECTION 12 3600 - COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for manufactured casework. B. Wall-hung counters. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 3530 - Residential Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. F. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3 Grade. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. b. NSF approved for food contact. c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade requirements for wear resistance. d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface. e. Finish: Matte.
April 2011 12 3600 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 12 3600 10-9050 COUNTERTOPS
f. Surface Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line. g. Manufacturers: 1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum 1-1/2 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top edge. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 4. Metal Support Brackets: 208 Ultimate L-Bracket by Knape & Vogt; 500mm size. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2. B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. C. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch. C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
April 2011 12 3600 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 12 3600 10-9050 COUNTERTOPS
B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
April 2011 12 3600 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 21 0500 10-9050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 21 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler, standpipe and fire hose, and combination sprinkler and standpipe systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Preparation and painting of fire protection piping systems. B. Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: Piping identification. C. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Piping identification. D. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). D. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). E. ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. F. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18). G. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. H. ASTM A 795/A 795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2008. I. ASTM B 75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2002. J. ASTM B 75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric); 1999 (Reapproved 2005). K. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. M. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). N. AWWA C110/A21.10 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through 48 In. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids; American Water Works Association; 2008.
April 2011 21 0500 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0500 10-9050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
O. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11). P. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). Q. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. R. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. S. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. 2.02 BURIED PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 or ASTM A 795 Standard Weight, black, with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; with double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings. 3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1. 4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation. B. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness.
April 2011 21 0500 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0500 10-9050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, black. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) or ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), H58 drawn temper. 1. Type: Type M (C). 2. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy solder joint, pressure type. 3. Joints: AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 copper/silver braze. C. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. D. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. E. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
April 2011 21 0500 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0500 10-9050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 09 9000. K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. L. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. N. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 21 0500 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 21 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASTM D 709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Automatic Controls: Tags. B. Control Panels: Nameplates. C. Instrumentation: Tags. D. Major Control Components: Nameplates. E. Piping: Tags. F. Pumps: Nameplates. G. Relays: Tags. H. Thermostats: Nameplates. I. Valves: Namplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.
April 2011 21 0553 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D 709. 2.03 TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter. C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter with smooth edges. D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.04 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters. 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters. C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
April 2011 21 0553 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 21 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.06 CEILING TACKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark: www.craftmarkid.com. B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000. D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. 1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 21 0553 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 21 1200 10-9050 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
SECTION 21 1200
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standpipe system. B. Fire department connection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Fire protection piping. B. Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. C. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems. D. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. C. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. D. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMIINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog sheet for equipment indicating rough-in size, finish, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate supports, components, accessories, and sizes. 1. Submit shop drawings and product data to Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. 2. Submit proof of approval to Tyson and Billy Architects. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. E. Operation Data: Include manufacturer's data. F. Maintenance Data: Include servicing requirements and test schedule. G. Certificates: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 14. Maintain one copy on site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES
April 2011 21 1200 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 21 1200 10-9050 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
A. Hose Connection Valve: Angle type; brass finish; 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) size, thread to match fire department hardware, 300 psi (2070 kPa) working pressure, with threaded cap and chain of same material and finish; refer to Section 21 0500. B. Pressure Reducing Valve: Angle type; brass finish with inner hydraulic controls; 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) size, thread to match fire department hardware, 400 psi (2760 kPa) inlet pressure, with threaded cap and chain of same material and finish; refer to Section 21 0500. C. Hose Connection Valve Cabinets: 1. Style: Recessed mounted. 2. Tub: 16 gage (1.6 mm) thick steel, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-in. 3. Door: 12 gage (2.7 mm) thick steel, flush, glazed with 6 mm thick wired glass full panel; hinged, positive latch device. 4. Finish: Prime Coated. 2.02 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. B. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. C. Drain: 3/4 inch (20 mm) automatic drip, outside. D. Label: "Standpipe - Fire Department Connection". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Connect standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection. D. Flush entire system of foreign matter. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshal.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 21 1200 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 0719 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 22 0719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. C. Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. D. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004. E. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007. F. ASTM C 449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007. G. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. H. ASTM C 533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2009. I. ASTM C 534/C 534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008. J. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007. K. ASTM C 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007. L. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2009. M. ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2009. N. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2009. O. ASTM C 610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2009. P. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008. Q. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007.
April 2011 22 0719 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 22 0719 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
R. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006. S. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. T. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. U. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. V. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. einsulation.com, Inc.: www.eninsulation.com 2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 3. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
April 2011 22 0719 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 0719 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm- inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m). 2.03 CELLULAR GLASS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation: www.pittsburghcorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 552, Grade 1. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.37 at 100 degrees F (0.053 at 38 degrees C). 2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F (482 degrees C). 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch (0.007 ng/Pa s m). 4. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum. 2.04 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE A. Insulation: ASTM C 578; rigid closed cell. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F (0.033 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 165 degrees F (74 degrees C). 3. Maximum water vapor permeance: 5.0 perms (287 ng/Pa s sq m) 2.05 POLYISOCYANURATE CELLULAR PLASTIC A. Insulation Material: ASTM C 591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular plastic. 1. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 585. 2. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.18 at 75 degrees F (0.026 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 3. Minimum Service Temperature: -70 degrees F (-51 degrees C). 4. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F (150 degrees C). 5. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2842.. 6. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4.0 perm in (5.8 ng/(Pa s m)). 7. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.06 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C). 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C). 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.07 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C). b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C). c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm). e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute
April 2011 22 0719 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 22 0719 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
fire retardant lagging adhesive. C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and unions at equipment. H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. I. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
April 2011 22 0719 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 22 0719 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8400. K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. M. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 22 0719 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 1005
PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Storm water. 4. Gas. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels. B. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. E. Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004). B. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). D. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). E. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18). F. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). G. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2002. H. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006. I. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. J. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). K. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968. L. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
April 2011 22 1005 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
M. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. N. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. O. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. P. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009. Q. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007. R. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. S. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002. T. ASTM B 68 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed; 2002. U. ASTM B 75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2002. V. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. W. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005. X. ASTM B 306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2009. Y. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009a. Z. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2006. AA. ASTM D 2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004. AB. ASTM D 2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter; 2003. AC. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009. AD. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2006. AE. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). AF. ASTM D 2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2008. AG. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2009. AH. ASTM D 2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001 (Reapproved 2009). AI. ASTM D 2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003. AJ. ASTM D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2005.
April 2011 22 1005 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
AK. ASTM D 2846/D 2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2009b. AL. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). AM. ASTM F 441/F 441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2009. AN. ASTM F 493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004. AO. ASTM F 628 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core; 2008. AP. ASTM F 708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 2008). AQ. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). AR. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005. AS. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004. AT. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009. AU. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002a. AV. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003. AW. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2006. AX. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2005. AY. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008. AZ. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002. BA. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. BB. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with City of Ft. Madison, IA, standards.
April 2011 22 1005 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX). E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with 2009 Edition of Universal plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.32, sovent. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. D. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. E. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2751 or ASTM F 628. 1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D 2235 cement. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2729. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
April 2011 22 1005 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
2.04 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.05 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2680 or ASTM D 2751. 1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D 2235 cement. 2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm) polyethylene tape. 2.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch (25 mm): 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.09 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
April 2011 22 1005 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) to 4 Inches (100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.10 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. C. 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger: 1. MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor. 2.11 GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. C. 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger: 1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor. 2.12 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
April 2011 22 1005 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
B. Construction, 4 Inches (100 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi (2760 kPa) CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. 2.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi (1380 kPa) CWP, cast or ductile iron body, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle. C. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches (150 mm) and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor. 2.14 FLOW CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 2. Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com. 3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com. B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain. C. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi psi (24 kPa kPa). 2.15 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends. 2.16 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com. 2. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. 3. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. B. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. C. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): 1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.17 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com.
April 2011 22 1005 - 7 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F (98.9 degrees C), capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labelled. 2.18 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryfiltration.com. 3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com. B. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm): 1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of
April 2011 22 1005 - 8 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
access doors with Section 08 3100. I. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. K. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. M. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 8. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. H. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. I. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
April 2011 22 1005 - 9 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1005 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer. C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg (1.75 kPa). Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. 3.08 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches (15 mm) to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft (2 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches (9 mm). b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm). c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) to 3 inches (75 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm). d. Pipe size: 4 inches (100 mm) to 6 inches (150 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch (15 mm). 2. Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft (1.8 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm).
END OF SECTION
April 2011 22 1005 - 10 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1006 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 1006
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Hose bibbs. D. Hydrants. E. Backflow preventers. F. Water hammer arrestors. G. Thermostatic mixing valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures. C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2007). B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011). C. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2002 (ANSI/ASSE 1012). D. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2005. E. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004, and Errata 2005 (ANSI/ASSE 1019). F. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: One. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
April 2011 22 1006 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1006 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Downspout Nozzles: 1. Bronze round with straight bottom section. C. Floor Drain (FD-1): 1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. D. Floor Drain (FD-2): 1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable round nickel bronze strainer with removable perforated sediment bucket. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4): 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.03 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 2.04 HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrowhead Brass Company: www.arrowheadbrass.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Wall Hydrants: 1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker. 2.05 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Oatey: www.oatey.com.
April 2011 22 1006 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1006 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
B. Valve Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for 2 inch (50 mm) waste, slip in finishing cover. 2.06 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Oatey: www.oatey.com. B. Valve Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip in finishing cover. 2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.08 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Double Check Valve Assemblies: 1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. 2.09 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure. 2.10 MIXING VALVES A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. ESBE: www.esbe.se/en.
April 2011 22 1006 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 22 1006 10-9050 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
b. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com. c. Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to washing machine outlets. H. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch (20 mm) minimum, and minimum 18 inches (450 mm) long.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 22 1006 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 22 3000 10-9050 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 3000
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. Water softeners. C. Pumps. 1. Circulators. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume I - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2009. B. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters; 2008. C. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label. C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.06 CERTIFICATIONS
April 2011 22 3000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 22 3000 10-9050 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A. Water Heaters: NSF approved. B. Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3, as applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co; Model Cyclone Xi BTH-199: www.hotwater.com. B. Bock Water Heaters, Inc: www.bockwaterheaters.com. C. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com. 2.02 RESIDENTIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. B. Performance: As scheduled C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel with single flue passage, flue baffle and draft hood; thermally insulated and encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs. D. Accessories: Provide: 1. Water Connections: Brass. 2. Dip Tube: Brass. 3. Drain Valve. 4. Anode: Magnesium. 2.03 WATER SOFTENERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Culligan International Company: www.culligan.com. 2. Sterling Water Systems, LLC: www.goodwaterco.com. B. Performance: 1. Softening Capacity: 10 grains. C. Control: Brass control valve cycled to regenerate from one to twelve day period. 2.04 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. Sterling Fluid Systems: www.sterlingfluid.com. 4. Taco; 0014 Cartridge Circulator: www.taco-hvac.com. B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly.
April 2011 22 3000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 3000 10-9050 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. G. Performance: As scheduled PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system. C. Pumps: 1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 22 3000 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 22 4000 10-9050 PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. Service sinks. E. Showers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors. B. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties. D. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z124.1.2 - American National Standard for Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units; 2005. B. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002). C. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. D. ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004). E. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008. F. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008. G. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004). H. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. I. ASME A112.19.14 - Six Liter Water Closets Equipped with Dual Flushing Device; 2006. J. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. K. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001 (2002) L. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
April 2011 22 4000 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 22 4000 10-9050 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS A. Tank Type Water Closet Manufacturers: As scheduled. 1. Eljer Inc; www.eljer.com. B. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 16.5 inches (420 mm) high, close-coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps, vandalproof cover locking device. C. Seat Manufacturers: 1. Eljer Inc; Model 124-0245: www.eljer.com. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, closed front, brass bolts, with cover. 2.02 LAVATORIES A. Lavatory Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Supply Faucet Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. C. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with pop-up waste, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 0.5 gallon per minute (low-flow) (1.9 liters per minute (low-flow)), indexed handles. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage (1.3 mm) brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 3. Wheel handle stops. 2.03 SINKS A. Sink Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 2.04 SHOWER RECEPTORS A. Solid Surfacing Shower Receptors: Solid plastic resin casting, self-supporting, for installation over conventional subfloor; complying with ANSI Z124.1.2.
April 2011 22 4000 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 22 4000 10-9050 PLUMBING FIXTURES
1. Material: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. B. Drain Trim: Removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece. 2.05 SHOWERS A. Shower Manufacturers: 1. Aquarius Bathware; Model 703A: www.aquariusproducts.com 2.06 SERVICE SINKS A. Bowl: 36 by 24 by 10 inch (900 by 600 by 250 mm) high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch (25 mm) wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer. B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges. C. Accessories: 1. 5 feet (1.5 m) of 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose. 2. Hose clamp hanger. 3. Mop hanger. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 9005, color to match fixture. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
April 2011 22 4000 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 22 4000 10-9050 PLUMBING FIXTURES
C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated. 1. Water Closet: a. Accessible: 18 inches (455 mm) to top of seat. 2. Lavatory: a. Accessible: 34 inches (865 mm) to top of basin rim. 3. Shower Heads: a. 69.5 inches (1765 mm) to bottom of head. B. Fixture Rough-In 1. Water Closet (Tank Type): a. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). b. Waste: 4 Inch (100 mm). c. Vent: 2 Inch (50 mm). 2. Lavatory: a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). 3. Sink: a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). 4. Service Sink: a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). c. Waste: 3 Inch (80 mm). d. Vent: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). 5. Shower: a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm).
END OF SECTION
April 2011 22 4000 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0130.51 10-9050 HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
SECTION 23 0130.51
HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of HVAC duct system, equipment, and related components. B. Testing and inspection agency employed by Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Additional requirements for testing and inspection agencies. B. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. C. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Commissioning requirements that apply to all types of work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. HVAC System: For purposes of this section, the surfaces to be cleaned include all interior surfaces of the heating, air-conditioning and ventilation system from the points where the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system, including the inside of air distribution equipment, coils, and condensate drain pans; see NADCA ACR for more details. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NADCA ACR - Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems; 2006. B. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. C. UL 181A - Standard for Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Closeout Report: Include field quality control reports, evidence of satisfactory cleaning, and documentation of items needing further repair. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A. Vacuum Devices and Other Tools: Exceptionally clean, in good working order, and sealed when brought into the facility. B. Vacuum Devices That Exhaust Air Inside Building, Including Hand-Held and Wet Vacuums: Equipped with HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for minimum 0.3-micron size particles and DOP test number. C. Vacuum Devices That Exhaust Air Outside Building, Including Truck- and Trailer-Mounted Types: Equipped with particulate collection including adequate filtration to contain debris removed from the HVAC system; exhausted in manner that prevents contaminant re-entry to building; compliant with applicable regulations as to outdoor environmental contamination. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS
April 2011 23 0130.51 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0130.51 10-9050 HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When cleaning work might adversely affect life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Ensure that electrical components that might be adversely affected by cleaning are de- energized, locked out, and protected prior to beginning work. C. Air-Volume Control Devices: Mark the original position of dampers and other air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system prior to starting cleaning. D. Access to Concealed Spaces: Use existing service openings and make additional service openings as required to accomplish cleaning and inspection. 1. Do not cut openings in non-HVAC components without obtaining the prior approval of Owner. 2. Make new openings in HVAC components in accordance with NADCA Standard 05; do not compromise the structural integrity of the system. 3. Do not cut service openings into flexible duct; disconnect at ends for cleaning and inspection. E. Ceiling Tile: Lay-in ceiling tile may be removed to gain access to HVAC systems during the cleaning process; protect tile from damage and reinstall upon completion; replace damaged tile. 3.03 CLEANING A. Use any cleaning method recommended by NADCA ACR unless otherwise specified; do not use methods prohibited by NADCA ACR, or that will damage HVAC components or other work, or that will significantly alter the integrity of the system. B. Obtain Owner's approval before using wet cleaning methods; ensure that drainage is adequate before beginning. C. Ducts: Mechanically clean all portions of ducts. D. Hoses, Cables, and Extension Rods: Clean using suitable sanitary damp wipes at the time they are being removed or withdrawn from their normal position. E. Registers, Diffusers, and Grilles: When removing, take care to prevent containment exposure due to accumulated debris.
April 2011 23 0130.51 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0130.51 10-9050 HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
F. Coils: Follow NADCA ACR completely including measuring static pressure drop before and after cleaning; do not remove refrigeration coils from system to clean; report coils that are permanently impacted. G. Collect debris removed during cleaning; ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process. H. Store contaminated tools and equipment in polyethylene bags until cleaned in the designated decontamination area. 3.04 REPAIR A. Repair openings cut in the ventilation system so that they do not significantly alter the airflow or adversely impact the facility's indoor air quality. B. At insulated ducts and components, accomplish repairs in such a manner as to achieve the equivalent thermal value. C. Reseal new openings in accordance with NADCA Standard 05. D. Reseal rigid fiber glass duct systems using closure techniques that comply with UL 181 or UL 181A. E. When new openings are intended to be capable of being re-opened in the future, clearly mark them and report their locations to Owner in project report documents. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure that the following field quality control activities are completed prior to application of any treatments or coatings and prior to returning HVAC system to normal operation. B. Visually inspect all portions of the cleaned components; if not visibly clean as defined in NADCA ACR, re-clean and reinspect. C. Coils: Cleaning must restore the coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of the coil's original installed pressure drop; if original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean if free of foreign matter and chemical residue based on visual inspection. D. Notify Tyson and Billy Architects when cleaned components are ready for inspection. E. Notify Owner's testing and inspection agency when cleaned components are ready for inspection. F. Owner reserves the right to verify cleanliness using NADCA ACR Surface Comparison Testing or NADCA Vacuum Test. G. When directed, re-clean components until they pass. H. shall bear the costs of retesting due to inadequate cleaning. I. Submit evidence that all portions of the system required to be cleaned have been cleaned satisfactorily. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. After satisfactory completion of field quality control activities, restore adjustable devices to original settings, including, but not limited to, dampers, air directional devices, valves, fuses, and circuit breakers. 3.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Double-bag all waste and debris in 0.24 inch (6 mm) polyethylene bags. B. Dispose of debris off-site in accordance with applicable federal, state and local requirements.
April 2011 23 0130.51 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0130.51 10-9050 HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 0130.51 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASTM D 709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling. B. Piping: Tags. C. Thermostats: Nameplates. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4. Letter Color: White. 5. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Background Color: Black. 2.03 TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 2.04 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
April 2011 23 0553 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters. 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters. 4. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) high letters. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. 2.06 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 0553 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0593 10-9050 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. C. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 2100 - Allowances: Inspection and testing allowances. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Employment of testing agency and payment for services. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002. B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with 1997 Errata. C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Submit to Tyson and Billy Architects. 2. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. C. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation. D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
April 2011 23 0593 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0593 10-9050 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
copies for Tyson and Billy Architects and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units. 6. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Tyson and Billy Architects. g. Project Engineer. h. Report date. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
April 2011 23 0593 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0593 10-9050 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Pumps are rotating correctly. 13. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.04 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
April 2011 23 0593 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0593 10-9050 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. J. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries. 3.06 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Fire Pumps 2. Plumbing Pumps 3. Forced Air Furnaces 4. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units 5. Fans 6. Air Inlets and Outlets 3.07 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM B. V-Belt Drives: 1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4. Belt, size and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM C. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Return air flow, specified and actual 7. Outside air flow, specified and actual 8. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 9. Inlet pressure 10. Discharge pressure 11. Number of Belts/Make/Size 12. Fan RPM
April 2011 23 0593 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0593 10-9050 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
D. Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow E. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Air flow, specified and actual 5. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 6. Fan RPM F. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure G. Duct Leak Tests: 1. Description of ductwork under test 2. Duct design operating pressure 3. Duct design test static pressure 4. Duct capacity, air flow 5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 6. Test apparatus 7. Test static pressure 8. Test orifice differential pressure 9. Leakage H. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Design air flow 6. Test (final) air flow 7. Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 0593 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 23 0713 10-9050 DUCT INSULATION
SECTION 23 0713
DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. B. Duct Liner. C. Insulation jackets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. C. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. D. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2008. E. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2009. F. ASTM C 916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985 (Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2005. H. ASTM C 1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2006. I. ASTM C 1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings; 2008. J. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. K. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. L. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). M. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. N. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
April 2011 23 0713 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0713 10-9050 DUCT INSULATION
thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F (0.052 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F (649 degrees C). 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch (0.029 ng/Pa s m), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.036 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F (232 degrees C). 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent. 4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft (128 kg/cu m).
April 2011 23 0713 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0713 10-9050 DUCT INSULATION
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch (0.029 ng/Pa s m), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 2.04 JACKETS A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 2.05 DUCT LINER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite. 1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G 21. 2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F (0.045 at 24 degrees C). 3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). 4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s), minimum. 5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: a. 1/2 inch (13 mm) Thickness: 0.30. b. 1 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 0.45. c. 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) Thickness: 0.60. d. 2 inch (50 mm) Thickness: 0.70. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C 916. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
April 2011 23 0713 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0713 10-9050 DUCT INSULATION
C. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. D. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 3. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 0713 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0913 10-9050 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 0913
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermostats. B. Automatic dampers. C. Damper operators. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers. D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Elevation of exposed components. E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). C. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. D. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
April 2011 23 0913 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0913 10-9050 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for control air compressors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.02 DAMPERS A. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D. B. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage (2.7 mm). C. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide, 48 inches (1200 mm) long, minimum 22 gage (0.85 mm), attached to minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) shafts with set screws. D. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric inflatable mechanically attached, field replaceable. 2.03 DAMPER OPERATORS A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout damper range. 2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft (3.24 sq m) damper section. 2.04 THERMOSTATS A. Electric Room Thermostats: 1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control. 2. Service: cooling and heating. B. Room Thermostat Accessories: 1. Adjusting Key: As required for device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. E. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
April 2011 23 0913 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 0913 10-9050 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate 60 inches (1500 mm) above floor. Align with lighting switches. Refer to Section 26 2726. C. Provide guards on thermostats in public areas. D. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 0913 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 23 3100 10-9050 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
SECTION 23 3100
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories. C. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. D. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. E. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. F. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition. G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. H. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. C. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
April 2011 23 3100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3100 10-9050 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on certerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. 2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with adhesive. C. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. E. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch (200 mm) and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. G. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot (300 mm) maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
April 2011 23 3100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3100 10-9050 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
H. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. I. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 3100 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 23 3300 10-9050 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 3300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backdraft dampers. B. Duct access doors. C. Duct test holes. D. Fire dampers. E. Flexible duct connections. F. Volume control dampers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers. D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
April 2011 23 3300 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3300 10-9050 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches (450 x 450 mm) or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. 2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. C. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch (250 Pa) pressure class ducts up to 12 inches (300 mm) in height. D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F (71 degrees C) with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m). a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches (50 mm) wide. 2.06 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Splitter Dampers:
April 2011 23 3300 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3300 10-9050 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches (600 mm). 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw . D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm). E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 m) for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. F. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. G. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment; see Section 22 0548. H. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 3300 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 23 3423 10-9050 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 23 3423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling exhaust fans. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers. C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2003. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51). C. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/licenses/search.aspx. D. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2006. E. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Performance Ratings: Per equipment schedules.
April 2011 23 3423 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3423 10-9050 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. C. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted switch. D. Grille: Molded white plastic, gasketed or sealed to the ceiling opening. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 3423 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3700 10-9050 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 23 3700
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers. D. Goosenecks. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2008. C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carnes Company HVAC: www.carnes.com. B. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. C. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. D. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
April 2011 23 3700 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3700 10-9050 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
D. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face. B. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel finish. D. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.04 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, one-way deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish. D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.05 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frames and 22 gage (0.80 mm) minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. 2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.07 LOUVERS A. Type: 4 inch (100 mm) deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch (13 mm) square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch (13 mm) square mesh screen over intake. B. Fabrication: 16 gage (1.50 mm) thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. 2.08 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of minimum 18 gage (1.20 mm) galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 12 inch (300 mm) high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch (230 x 230
April 2011 23 3700 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 3700 10-9050 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
mm). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 3700 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 23 5400 10-9050 FURNACES
SECTION 23 5400
FURNACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forced air furnaces. B. Controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment: Additional requirements for fan motors. B. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: Duct Liner. D. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. E. Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats, humidistats, time clocks. F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections and installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ARI 610 - Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications; Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2004. B. ASHRAE Std 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1992. C. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. D. ASHRAE Std 90.2 - Energy-Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. E. ASHRAE Std 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1993 with 1996 Errata. F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. G. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. H. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. I. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. J. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
April 2011 23 5400 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 5400 10-9050 FURNACES
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for heat exchangers, condensing units, and compressors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. B. Trane Inc: www.trane.com. 2.02 GAS FIRED FURNACES A. Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE): 0.95 ("condensing"). B. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating element, controls, air filter, humidifier, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Safety certified by CSA in accordance with ANSI Z 21.47. 2. Venting System: Direct. 3. Combustion: Sealed 4. Air Flow Configuration: Upflow. 5. Heating: Natural gas fired. C. Performance: 1. Refer to Furnace Schedule. Gas heating capacities are sea level ratings. D. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. If not certified for combustible flooring, please provide additional steel base. E. Primary Heat Exchanger: 1. Material: Hot-rolled steel 2. Shape: Tubular type. F. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, 2. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On-Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve. 3. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter. 4. Combustion air damper with synchronous spring return damper motor. 5. Non-corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor. G. Gas Burner Safety Controls:
April 2011 23 5400 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 5400 10-9050 FURNACES
1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. 3. Vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. 4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets. H. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley. I. Motor: Refer to Section 22 0513; 1750 rpm single speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted. J. Air Filters: 1 inch (25 mm) thick urethane, washable type arranged for easy replacement. K. Operating Controls 1. Room Thermostat: Cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Supply Fan Control: Energize from bonnet temperature independent of burner controls, with adjustable timed off delay and fixed timed on delay, with manual switch for continuous fan operation. Provide continuous low speed fan operation. 2.03 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. 2. Trane Inc: www.trane.com. B. Room Thermostat: Low voltage, controlling heat and fan to maintain temperature setting; with system selector switch (heat-off) and fan control switch (auto-off). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available and located correctly. C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 5400 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 23 6313 10-9050 AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
SECTION 23 6313
AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refrigerant condenser package. B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. C. Controls and control connections. D. Motor starters. E. Electrical power connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Equipment bases. B. Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D. Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping. E. Section 23 6100 - Refrigerant Compressors. F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ARI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008. B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. C. ASHRAE Std 20 - Methods of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical-Draft Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1997 (R2006). D. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. E. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts showing condenser, refrigeration compressors, cooling coils, refrigerant piping and accessories required for complete system. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's complete installation instructions. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
April 2011 23 6313 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 6313 10-9050 AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. B. Trane Inc: www.trane.com. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit, suitable for outdoor use consisting of casing, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil liquid accumulator. B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240 and UL 207. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Std 20. C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficient Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE Std 90.1, in combination with compressor units. 2.03 CASING A. House components in welded steel frame with steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened. C. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners. 2.04 CONDENSER COILS A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits. Air test under water to 425 psig (2900 kPa), and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding charge of refrigerant. 2.05 FANS AND MOTORS A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing. B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3 phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built-in current and thermal overload protection; refer to Section 23 0513. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 2717. C. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system. Refer to Section 23 2300. Comply with ASHRAE Std 15. D. Provide cooling season start-up, winter season shut-down service, for first year of operation. E. Shut-down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season. END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 6313 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 23 8113 10-9050 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS
SECTION 23 8113
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Unitary air conditioners. B. Controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Evaporator and condenser fan motors. B. Section 23 6313 - Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers. C. Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Installation and wiring of thermostats and other control components. D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Installation and wiring of thermostats and other control components. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate water, drain, thermostatic valves, and electrical rough-in connections with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Suburban: www.suburban-hvac.com. 2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Description: Packaged, self-contained, factory assembled, prewired unit, consisting of cabinet, compressor, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, discharge plenum, outside air connection, heating coil, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. B. Assembly: Up flow air delivery, in draw-through configuration as indicated.
April 2011 23 8113 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 23 8113 10-9050 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS
C. Energy Efficiency: 1. Cooling Capacity: Greater than or equal to 7000 Btu/h (2052 W) and less than or equal to 15000 Btu/h (4396 kW): a. Energy Efficiency Ratio: 10.0, minimum. b. Coefficient of Performance: 3.6, minimum. 2.03 CABINET A. Frame and Panels: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed access doors or panels with quick fasteners. B. Insulation: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior. C. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2.04 EVAPORATOR FAN 2.05 COMPRESSOR A. Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection. 2.06 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Direct expansion coiling coil of seamless copper or aluminum tubes expanded into aluminum fins. B. Refrigeration circuit with externally equalized thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, and charging valves. 2.07 CONDENSER A. Co-Axial, copper tube in copper tube or shell and tube with finned copper tubes in steel shell with water temperature actuated water regulating valve. B. Fan: Double width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically balanced, with permanently lubricated bearings. C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. 2.08 CONTROLS A. Factory wired controls shall include contactor, high and low pressure cutouts, internal winding thermostat for compressor, control circuit transformer, non-cycling reset relay. B. Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor, condenser, and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. Include system selector switch (heat-off-cool), and fan control switch (auto-on). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide shut-off valves in condenser water inlet and outlet piping. C. Pipe condensate from drain pan to nearest floor drain.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 23 8113 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0519 10-9050 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway, building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, armored cable, or metal clad cable. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway, building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, armored cable, or metal clad cable. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway, building wire with Type _____ insulation in raceway, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, armored cable, or metal clad cable. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway, direct burial cable, armored cable with jacket, or metal clad cable. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway, direct burial cable, service-entrance cable, armored cable with jacket, or metal clad cable. F. Underground Installations: Use only service-entrance cable. G. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (25 m). I. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
April 2011 26 0519 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0519 10-9050 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
J. If aluminum conductor is substituted for copper conductor, size to match circuit requirements for conductor ampacity and voltage drop. 2.02 WIRE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro Wire Inc: www.cerrowire.com. B. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.iewc.com. C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 2.03 BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 2.04 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type NMC. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 2.05 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type SE. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: Type RH. 2.06 ARMORED CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 300 volts. 2.07 METAL CLAD CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 60 degrees C. E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. F. Armor Material: Steel. G. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape. 2.08 WIRING CONNECTORS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
April 2011 26 0519 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0519 10-9050 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. C. Use wiring methods indicated. D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. E. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. F. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. G. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. H. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. I. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. J. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill with anti- oxidant compound before installing conductor. K. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors. L. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. M. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0519 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 26 0526 10-9050 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding components. B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Concrete-encased electrode. 3. Rod electrodes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. C. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. B. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com. C. Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com. 2.02 ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. 2. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com. 3. Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com.
April 2011 26 0526 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0526 10-9050 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Rod Electrodes: Copper. 1. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Length: 8 feet (2400 mm). 2.03 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. B. Exothermic Connections: C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. B. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together. C. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0526 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0529 10-9050 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. B. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010 C. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009. D. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts. 2. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 3. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 4. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. D. Fastener Types: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
April 2011 26 0529 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0529 10-9050 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Achors: Compying with ICC-ES AC308. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Tyson and Billy Architects before drilling or cutting structural members. B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0529 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0534 10-9050 CONDUIT
SECTION 26 0534
CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005. D. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and conduit bodies. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
April 2011 26 0534 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0534 10-9050 CONDUIT
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. B. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than 5 Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or plastic coated conduit. 2. Within 5 Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or plastic coated conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. D. In Slab Above Grade: 1. Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch (19 mm); 1/2 inch (13 mm) for conduits crossing each other. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or nonmetallic tubing. F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or nonmetallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 3. Picoma;: www.picoma.com. 4. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
April 2011 26 0534 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0534 10-9050 CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 3. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com. B. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 3. Picoma;: www.picoma.com. 4. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type. 2.07 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. B. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.08 NONMETALLIC TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 2. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com. 3. Picoma; : www.picoma.com. 4. Lamson & Sessions (Carlon): www.carlon.com. B. Description: NEMA TC 2. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.
April 2011 26 0534 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0534 10-9050 CONDUIT
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101. C. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 0529. H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. I. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. J. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. K. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. M. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. R. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0526. W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0534 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0537 10-9050 BOXES
SECTION 26 0537
BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com. B. Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology: www.arc-co.com. C. Unity Manufacturing: www.unitymfg.com. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.
April 2011 26 0537 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0537 10-9050 BOXES
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717. D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726. G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. L. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. M. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. N. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. O. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. P. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Q. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. R. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. S. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches (305 mm) of box. T. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. U. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
April 2011 26 0537 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0537 10-9050 BOXES
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0537 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 26 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Field-painted identification of conduit. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Buried Electrical Lines: Underground warning tapes. B. Communication Cabinets: Nameplates. C. Conduit: Conduit markers. D. Control Device Station: Labels. E. Electrical Distribution and Control Equipment Enclosures: Nameplates. F. Junction Box Load Connections: Wire markers. G. Outlet Box Load Connections: Wire markers. H. Panel Gutter Load Connections: Wire markers. I. Pull Box Load Connections: Wire markers. 2.02 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. C. Letter Size:
April 2011 26 0553 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0553 10-9050 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Use 1/8 inch (3 mm) letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch (6 mm) letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations. 2.03 WIRE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 3. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com. B. Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers. C. Color: Black on white. D. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 3. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches (75 mm) below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0553 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0919 10-9050 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
SECTION 26 0919
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose contactors. B. Lighting contactors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Engraved nameplates. C. Section 26 2813 - Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005). B. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993 (R2006). C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation: www.ab.com. B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.
April 2011 26 0919 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0919 10-9050 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
B. Configuration: Electrically held. C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. D. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform applicable inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.16.1.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0919 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0923 10-9050 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 0923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Time switches. B. Outdoor photo controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for lighting control devices. D. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors. E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, fan speed controllers, and wall plates. F. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting. G. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2006. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. D. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 917 - Clock-Operated Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Notify Tyson and Billy Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. C. Shop Drawings: D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
April 2011 26 0923 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0923 10-9050 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. 2.02 TIME SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com. 2. Paragon, a brand of Invensys Controls: www.invensyscontrols.com. 3. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com. B. Digital Electronic Time Switches: 1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display, listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917. 2. Program Capability: a. 24-Hour Time Switches: Single channel, with same schedule for each day of the week and skip-a-day feature to omit selected days. b. 7-Day Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedule for selected days. c. Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedule for selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to automatically adjust for seasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times. 3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations. 4. Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation. 5. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock. 6. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and temporarily until next scheduled event. 7. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings. 8. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the following installation locations: 2.03 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com. 2. Paragon, a brand of Invensys Controls: www.invensyscontrols.com. 3. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
April 2011 26 0923 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 0923 10-9050 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 2726. G. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. H. Outdoor Photo Control Locations: 1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down. 2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself. I. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed by Tyson and Billy Architects. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 0923 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 26 2416 10-9050 PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Load centers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006). C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. D. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As indicated.
April 2011 26 2416 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2416 10-9050 PANELBOARDS
D. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: With replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed. G. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole: UL listed. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. H. Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with bimetal overload relay. 1. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz. I. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, _____ inches (_____ mm) deep, _____ inches (_____ mm) wide, cabinet box. J. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated. 1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed. 1. Type SWD for lighting circuits. 2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits. 3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 480 volt panelboards. G. Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.04 LOAD CENTERS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1. B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor. D. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise
April 2011 26 2416 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2416 10-9050 PANELBOARDS
directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 0553. F. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2416 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 26 2701 10-9050 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
SECTION 26 2701
ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metering transformer cabinets. B. Meter bases. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards: Metering transformer compartment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 120/240 volts, single phase, three-wire, 60 Hertz. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com. B. Milbank Manufacturing: www.milbankmfg.com. C. Square D: www.squared.com. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Meter Base: Rated 200 amperes continuous duty with the following features: 1. 4 jaws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install service rack, weatherhead, transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company. B. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
April 2011 26 2701 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2701 10-9050 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2701 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2717 10-9050 EQUIPMENT WIRING
SECTION 26 2717
EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit. B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less). C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
April 2011 26 2717 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2717 10-9050 EQUIPMENT WIRING
3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. : 1. Electrical Connection: Flexible conduit. 2. Electrical Connection: Cord and plug (NEMA 6-20R). 3. Provide field-installed disconnect switch. 4. Voltage: 240 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz. 5. FLA: 31.6 amperes. 6. Branch Circuit: 60 ampere fuse, maximum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2717 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2726 10-9050 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for wiring devices. D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.
April 2011 26 2726 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2726 10-9050 WIRING DEVICES
3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 4. Notify Tyson and Billy Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units. E. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6 feet (1.8 m) of sinks. F. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed in kitchens. 2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 1. All Wiring Devices: White with white nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
April 2011 26 2726 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2726 10-9050 WIRING DEVICES
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. C. Standard Wall Switches: Residential grade, 20 A, 120 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings. C. Incandescent Wall Dimmers: 120 V AC, slide control type with separate on/off switch; single pole or three way as indicated on the drawings. 1. Power Rating: 600 W unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 2.06 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Residential grade, 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Residential grade, 15A, 125V, NEMA 5- 15R,, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Residential grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Residential grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
April 2011 26 2726 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2726 10-9050 WIRING DEVICES
2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. c. Receptacles: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor or 6 inches (150 mm) above counter. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches (80 mm) from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Tyson and Billy Architects to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and
April 2011 26 2726 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2726 10-9050 WIRING DEVICES
tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed- through wiring to protect downstream devices. I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. J. Install wall switches with OFF position down. K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2726 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 26 2813 10-9050 FUSES
SECTION 26 2813
FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time-current curves. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Bussmann: www.bussmann.com. B. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc: www.ferrazshawmut.com. C. Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com. 2.02 FUSES - GENERAL A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. B. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage. C. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). D. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). E. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). F. Lighting Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). G. Other Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). H. Motor Branch Circuits: Class L time delay. I. Lighting Branch Circuits: Class G. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
April 2011 26 2813 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2813 10-9050 FUSES
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2813 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2817 10-9050 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 2817
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Engraved nameplates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves, dimensions, and enclosure details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. 2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.03 TRIP UNITS A. Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger with mechanism for adjusting long time continuous current, short time pickup current setting for automatic operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test each circuit breaker. C. Inspect each circuit breaker visually. D. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker. E. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position.
April 2011 26 2817 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2817 10-9050 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. G. Include description of testing and results in test report. 3.03 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2817 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2818 10-9050 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
SECTION 26 2818
ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 2813 - Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007). B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006). C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
April 2011 26 2818 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 2818 10-9050 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 2818 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. F. Lamps. G. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. B. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylighting controls. C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002. B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002. C. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008). D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. F. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. G. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. I. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. J. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
April 2011 26 5100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify Tyson and Billy Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. B. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. C. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com. 2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.03 LUMINAIRES A. Manufacturers: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. 2. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. 3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com. B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
April 2011 26 5100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. H. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. I. Fluorescent Luminaires: 1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required. 2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. 2. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. 3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com. B. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. D. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. E. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. F. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. G. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status. 2.05 EXIT SIGNS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. 2. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. 3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.
April 2011 26 5100 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
B. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. 2.06 BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com. 2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance: www.advance.philips.com. B. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. C. Fluorescent Ballasts: 1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935. a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. b. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 20 percent. c. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95. d. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors. e. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. f. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker. g. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 20 kHz, except as specified below. h. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7. i. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring resetting of power. j. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for T5 and smaller diameter lamp ballasts. k. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A. l. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application. m. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections. 2. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Lamp Starting Method: 1) T8 Lamp Ballasts: Instant start unless otherwise indicated. 2) Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. b. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C), and energy saving lamp(s) at a minimum of 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. D. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029. 1. Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts: a. All Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:
April 2011 26 5100 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1) Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. 2) Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 15 percent. 3) Power Factor: Not less than 0.90. 4) Provide thermal protection with automatic reset. 5) Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. 6) Lamp Operating Frequency: Less than 200 Hz or as required to avoid acoustic resonance in lamp arc tube. 7) Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.5. 8) Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry. 9) Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A. 10) Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non- consumer application. 2. High Pressure Sodium Ballasts: a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent. b. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated. c. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting lamp(s) at a minimum of -22 degrees F (-30 degrees C). 2.07 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Iota Engineering, LLC: www.iotaengineering.com. 2. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonia.com. 3. Philips Emergency Lighting/Bodine: www.bodine.com. B. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. C. Compatibility: 1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits. D. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. E. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation. F. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status and field selectable audible alert. 2.08 LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com. 2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Company: www.lighting.philips.com. B. All Lamps:
April 2011 26 5100 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Tyson and Billy Architects to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. C. Incandescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for lighting fixture; 130 V rated. D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. 1. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. 2. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. 3. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. E. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. 1. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80. c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. F. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position, and base type as required for luminaire. 1. Metal Halide Lamps: a. Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Phosphor coated lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. b. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps: 1) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,000 K unless otherwise indicated. 2. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: a. Average Rated Life: Not less than 24,000 hours for an operating cycle of ten hours per start. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted as directed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION
April 2011 26 5100 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. F. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. 2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. G. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. 2. Install canopies tight to mounting surface. H. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. K. Emergency Lighting Units: L. Exit Signs: M. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units: N. Install lamps in each luminaire. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Tyson and Billy Architects.
April 2011 26 5100 - 7 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5100 10-9050 INTERIOR LIGHTING
3.04 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Tyson and Billy Architects. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Tyson and Billy Architects or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Tyson and Billy Architects or authority having jurisdiction. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 5100 - 8 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5600 10-9050 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires. B. Ballasts. C. Lamps. D. Poles and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. C. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors. D. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including outdoor motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls. E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles. F. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. D. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height. 2. Notify Tyson and Billy Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
April 2011 26 5600 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5600 10-9050 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. B. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. C. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com. 2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the Drawings. 2.03 LUMINAIRES A. Manufacturers: 1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com. 2. Cooper Lighting: www.cooperlighting.com. 3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com. B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. 2.04 BALLASTS A. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. 2.05 LAMPS A. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Tyson and Billy Architects to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. 2.06 POLES A. All Poles: 1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed.
April 2011 26 5600 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 26 5600 10-9050 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. F. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install lamps in each luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Tyson and Billy Architects. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Tyson and Billy Architects. Secure locking fittings in place. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 26 5600 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SECTION 28 3100
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station. C. Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit. D. Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated. E. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed by this installer. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Electrically operated locks and door holder devices to be monitored and released by fire alarm system. C. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devices installed in sprinkler system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 2008. C. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of designer qualifications. C. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: 1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. 5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit programming. 6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated. 8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and circuit length limitations.
April 2011 28 3100 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating adequate battery power. 10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract documents. 12. Certification by that the system design complies with the contract documents. 13. Do not show existing components to be removed. D. Evidence of installer qualifications. E. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer. F. Inspection and Test Reports: 1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out. G. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same manuals. 3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call- back service. 4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. 5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. 6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling. H. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones. 2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. 3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart, and voice messages by event. I. Closeout Documents: 1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. 3. Maintenance contract. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer,, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction.
April 2011 28 3100 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. C. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Control Units - Basis of Design: SELECT/ENTER MANUFACTURER NAME AND ENTER MODEL NUMBER. B. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. c. Applicable local codes. d. The contract documents (drawings and specifications). e. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 4. Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones; allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. 5. Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated, with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor, on the floor above, and the floor below. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by Owner. 8. Fire Command Center: Location indicated on drawings. 9. Master Control Unit (Panel): New, located at fire command center. B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. 2. On-Premises Supervising Station: Existing proprietary station operated by Owner. 3. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A. 2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Within Single Building: Class B, Style 0.5. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W.
April 2011 28 3100 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
D. Power Sources: 1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary: Storage batteries. 3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. 4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS A. On-Premises Supervising Station: Include as part of this work all modifications necessary to existing supervising station to accommodate new fire alarm work. B. Clearly label components that are "Not In Service." C. Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly. 2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water control valves. 2. Dry-pipe sprinkler system pressure. 3. Dry-pipe sprinkler valve room low temperature. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water flow. 2.05 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. 2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Master Control Unit: As specified for Basis of Design above, or equivalent. D. Initiating Devices: E. Notification Appliances: F. Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet (60 m) extra; color code and label. G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. H. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. I. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. 1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. 2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. 3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. 4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.
April 2011 28 3100 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.03 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty period, to include the work described below. C. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
April 2011 28 3100 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 28 3100 10-9050 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract. E. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule. F. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit. G. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.
END OF SECTION
April 2011 28 3100 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 31 1000 10-9050 SITE CLEARING
SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Removal of existing debris. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. B. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000. B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. 3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. 3.03 VEGETATION A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, paving, playing fields, lawns, and planting beds. B. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits. 2. Around trees to remain within vegetation removal limits; locate no closer to tree than at the drip line. C. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated. D. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. 3.04 DEBRIS A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION
April 2011 31 1000 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 31 2200 10-9050 GRADING
SECTION 31 2200 - GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site. C. Topsoil and finish grading. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling and compaction. D. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities. E. Section 32 9219 - Seeding: Finish ground cover. F. Section 32 9300 - Plants: Topsoil in beds and pits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Illinois, Department of Transportation, IDOT standards, and Geotechnical Engineering Report. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: See Section 31 2323. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 2323. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
April 2011 31 2200 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2200 10-9050 GRADING
D. Do not remove wet subsoil , unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. 3.04 SOIL STOCKPILING A. Stockpile excavated topsoil on site. B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. D. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, and planting are indicated. E. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. F. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass: 6 inches. 2. Areas to be Sodded: 6 inches. 3. Shrub Beds: 24 inches. G. Place topsoil during dry weather. H. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. I. Near plants and buildings spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. K. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/2" in 10 foot from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 31 2323 for compaction density testing. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Recompact and regrade areas as necessary to restore quality, appearance, and condition of work. C. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION
April 2011 31 2200 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2316 10-9050 EXCAVATION
SECTION 31 2316 - EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for building volume below grade. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building perimeter. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Soil removal from surface of site. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Grading. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. D. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main connections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Illinois Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction. B. Geotechnical Engineering Report 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate construction operations. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade regardless of materials encountered. Repair Excavations beyond elevations and dimensions indicated as follows: 1. At structure: Concrete or structural fill. 2. Elsewhere: backfill and compact as directed. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 2323. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
April 2011 31 2316 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2316 10-9050 EXCAVATION
J. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 2200. Allow for proper drainage and do not stockpile materials within drip line of trees. K. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION
April 2011 31 2316 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2316.13 10-9050 TRENCHING
SECTION 31 2316.13 - TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Building and foundation excavating. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Backfilling at building and foundations. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Illinois Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. B. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. D. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)). E. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). F. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: 10 lb sample of each type of fill; submit in air-tight containers to testing laboratory. C. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. D. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. E. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. D. Protect plants, lawns, and other features to remain. E. Protect bench marks and survey control points from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. B. Structural Fill: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. C. Concrete for Fill: As specified in Section 03 3000; compressive strength of 3000 psi. D. Granular Fill: Coarse aggregate, conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. E. Sand: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard.
April 2011 31 2316.13 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2316.13 10-9050 TRENCHING
F. Topsoil: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven , . 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, testing of samples for compliance will be provided before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. H. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. I. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft , unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete.
April 2011 31 2316.13 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2316.13 10-9050 TRENCHING
2. Other areas: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 90 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. At Paved Areas and within Public Right-of-Ways: 1. Use compacted granular trench backfill. C. Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank: 1. Bedding: Use granular fill. 2. Cover with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. D. At Pipe Culverts: 1. Bedding: Use granular fill. 2. Place filter fabric specified in Section 33 0513 over compacted bedding. 3. Cover with general fill. 4. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 5. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. E. At French Drains and Well Points: 1. Use granular fill. 2. Fill up to 8 inches below finish grade. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. B. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION
April 2011 31 2316.13 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 31 2323 10-9050 FILL
SECTION 31 2323 - FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade, footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, utilities within the building, and to achieve contours and elevations indicated. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. C. Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition) operations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading. C. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. D. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. B. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). D. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. E. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)). F. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. G. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). H. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). I. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). J. Illinois Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. K. Geotechnical Engineering Report. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. C. Compaction Density Test Reports. D. An Illinois registered engineer, engaged in soil testing, shall advise the architect (in writing) that all footings are bearing on soil having design capacity. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
April 2011 31 2323 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2323 10-9050 FILL
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Subbase material: graded for intended use as subbase for paving materials: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. B. Drainage Fill: Washed gravel or crushed stone, 1/4" to 3/4" size; ASTM C33, Size 67. C. General Fill - Fill Type mineral soil substantial free from organic and unsuitable materials: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris; 80% passing No. 40 sieve and not more than 50% passing No. 200 sieve. D. Structural Fill - Fill Type gravel or sandy gravel free of organic and unsuitable materials and within following gradation limits and conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. E. Granular Fill - Gravel: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136, within the following limits: a. 4 inch sieve: 100 percent finer by weight. b. 1 inch sieve: 95 percent passing. c. 3/4 inch sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing. d. 5/8 inch sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing. e. 3/8 inch sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing. f. No. 4 sieve: 35 to 60 percent passing. g. No. 16 sieve: 15 to 35 percent passing. h. No. 40: 10 to 25 percent passing. i. No. 200: 5 to 10 percent passing. F. Granular Fill - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol GM. G. Sand: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. H. Topsoil: Conforming to State of Illinois Department of Transportation standard. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. B. Vapor Retarder: 10 mil thick, polyethylene. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. D. The contractor shall employ and pay for an independent approved testing laboratory, approved by architect, to make the following tests. 1. Maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557 for each type of soil to be used for compacted fill. 2. In place field dry density tests for every 2,500 square feet of area of each layer of compacted subgrade fill other than drainage fill under building slabs as directed by the architect. 3. In-place field dry density tests of each layer of compacted fill under all footings as directed by architect.
April 2011 31 2323 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2323 10-9050 FILL
4. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, make the necessary number of extra in-place field dry density tests to determine the extent of recompaction work required and perform whatever recompaction is then necessary. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements. C. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to the soils report and follow recommendations B. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 6 inches to identify soft spots. C. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with appropriate fill. D. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. E. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Refer to soils report and follow recommendations. B. Place acceptable materials in layers not more than 8" loose depth for materials compacted by heavy equipment and not more than 4" loose depth for materials compacted by hand equipment to subgrades indicated as follows: 1. Structural fill: Use under foundations, slabs, on grade in layers as indicated. 2. Drainage fill: Use under building slabs, at foundation drainage and elsewhere as indicated. 3. Common fill: Use under unpaved areas. 4. Subbase material: Use under pavement, walks, steps, piping, and conduit. C. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. 1. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft , unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated. H. Compact materials at the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 1557 by aeration or wetting to the following percentages of maximum density. 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, structure, walkways, and similar construction: Subgrade and each fill layer to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Unpaved areas: Top 6" of subgrade and each fill layer to 90 percent of maximum dry density. I. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.
April 2011 31 2323 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 31 2323 10-9050 FILL
B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade and paving. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION
April 2011 31 2323 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 32 0190 10-9050 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
SECTION 32 0190 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Maintain plants in manner that promotes health, growth, color and appearance, to quality levels specified; replace dead, dying, and damaged plants at no extra cost to Owner. 1. It is Contractor's responsibility to determine type and quantity of soil amendments and fertilizer required. B. Clean up landscaped areas. C. Maintenance Period: The time frame covered by these requirements is 90 days: 1. Start Date: Project Date of Substantial Completion. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Section 32 9219 - Seeding. C. Section 32 9223 - Sodding. D. Section 32 9300 - Plants. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A300 Part 1 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations -- Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Maintenance -- Standard Practices. B. ANSI Z133.1 - American National Standard For Arboricultural Operations - Pruning, Repairing, Maintaining, And Removing Trees, And Cutting Brush - Safety Requirements. C. ASTM D 4972 - Standard Test Method for pH of Soils. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. If soil analysis has not already been performed, take sufficient samples to obtain a comprehensive analysis; perform analysis in accordance with ASTM D 4972. 3.02 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE - GENERAL A. Protect existing vegetation, pavements, and facilities from damage due to maintenance activities; restore damaged items to original condition or replace, at no extra cost to Owner. B. General Cleanup: Remove debris from all landscape areas at least once a week and from turf areas before each mowing. 1. Debris consists of trash, rubbish, dropped leaves, downed branches and limbs of all sizes, dead vegetation, rocks, and other material not belonging in landscaped areas. 2. Remove debris from site and dispose of properly. C. Watering, Soil Erosion, and Sedimentation Control: Comply with federal, state, local, and other regulations in force; prevent over-watering, run-off, erosion, puddling, and ponding. 1. Repair temporary erosion control mechanisms provided by others. 2. Repair eroded areas and replant, when caused by inadequate maintenance. 3. Prevent sediment from entering storm drains. D. Trees: Exercise care to avoid girdling trees; provide protective collars if necessary; remove protective collars at end of maintenance period. E. Fertilizing: Apply fertilizer only when necessary. F. Drainage Channels: Remove obstructions in gutters, catch basins, storm drain inlets, yard drains, swales, ditches, and overflows. 1. Remove grates from catch basins to clean. 2. Prevent encroachment of other vegetation on turfed surface drainage channels.
April 2011 32 0190 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 0190 10-9050 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
G. Health Maintenance: Inspect all plants regularly for health: 1. Eradicate diseases and damaging pests, regardless of severity or speed of effect. 2. Treat accidental injuries and abrasions. 3. If a plant is unhealthy but not yet dead, according to specified definitions, determine reason(s) and take remedial action immediately. 4. Remove dead plants immediately upon determining that they are dead. H. Pesticide and Herbicide Application: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and applicable regulations. 1. Obtain Owner's approval prior to each application. 2. Apply in manner to prevent injury to personnel and damage to property due to either direct spray or drifting, both on and off Owner's property. 3. Use backflow preventers on hose bibbs used for mixing water; prevent spills. 4. Inspect equipment daily before application; repair leaks, clogs, wear, and damage. 5. Do not dispose of excess mixed material, unmixed material, containers, residue, rinse water, or contaminated articles on site; dispose of off site in legal manner. 6. Rinse water may be used as mix water for next batch of same formulation. 7. Contractor is responsible for all recordkeeping, submissions, and reports required by laws and regulations. I. Replanting: Perform replacement and replanting immediately upon removal of dead plant. 3.03 IRRIGATION A. Irrigation: Do not allow plants to wilt; apply water as required to supplement rainfall; do not waste water; do not water plants or areas not needing water; do not water during rainfall; shut off water flow when finished; repair leaks. 1. Owner's water source may be used. 2. Do not drive water trucks over turf, seeded areas, or planting beds. 3.04 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain turf in manner required to produce turf that is healthy, uniform in color and leaf texture, and free from weeds and other undesirable growth. 1. Grass Density - Lawns: 20 plants per square foot, minimum. 2. Bare Spots - Lawns: 2 percent of total area, maximum; 6 inches square, maximum. 3. Keep turf relatively free of thatch, woody plant roots, diseases, nematodes, soil-borne insects, stones larger than 1 inch in diameter, and other materials detrimental to grass growth. 4. Limit broadleaf weeds and patches of foreign grass to a maximum of 2 percent of the total area. B. Mowing: During growing season(s) mow turf to uniform height, in manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, and uneven or rough cutting. 1. Prior to mowing clean all debris and leaves from turf surface. 2. Schedule frequency of mowing so that no more than one-quarter to one-third of grass leaf length is removed during a cutting. a. Maximum grass height before mowing: 4 inches. b. Height of turf is measured from the soil surface. 3. Make each successive mowing at approximately 45 degrees to the previous mowing, if practical. 4. Cool Season Grasses: a. Reduce mowing height in fall and spring. b. Use rotary type mowers; mulcher type mowers may be used. 5. Warm Season Grasses: a. Increase mowing height slightly as fall approaches. b. Use reel type mowers; do not use mulcher mowers. C. Trimming: Immediately after each mowing, neatly trim perimeter of each turf area and around obstructions within turf area; match height and appearance of adjacent turf.
April 2011 32 0190 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 0190 10-9050 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
1. Adjacent to Pavements: Cut edges of turf to form a distinct, uniform turf edge. 2. Adjacent to Planting Beds and Permanently Mulched Areas: Cut edges of turf to form a distinct, uniform turf edge. 3. Around Other Trees and Poles: Where no planting bed or mulched area exists, trimming with string trimmer is acceptable. 4. At Fences: Trim on both sides of fence. 5. Irrigation Heads and Valve Boxes: Trim neatly so grass doesn't interfere with operation. D. Fertilizer: Apply as recommended by manufacturer and at rate indicated by soil analysis. 1. Cool Season Grasses: Apply at least once, in Fall before first frost; do not apply high nitrogen fertilizer during Summer; Spring application is optional but must be reduced in quantity. 3.05 PLANTING BED MAINTENANCE A. Planting beds include all planted areas except turf. B. Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed; inspect at least once a week and perform needed maintenance promptly. C. Keep planting beds free of pests; remove weeds and grass by hand before reaching 1 inch height. D. Do not allow climbing, twining, or creeping plants to encroach into other species. E. Ground Cover and Vines: 1. Trim to encourage dense, well-developed growth covering intended areas. 2. Do not allow plants to grow up trees, shrubs, or vines or encroach into turf or drainage channels, unless the drainage channel is intended to be planted with ground cover. 3. Remove existing plants grown up trees, shrubs, and vines. F. Flowering Plants: Remove dead flower heads; do not trim off leaves of flowering bulbs until they are brown. G. Replace mulch as required and remove debris. 3.06 TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE A. Trees will be considered dead when main leader has died back or when 25 percent or more of crown has died ; except as otherwise indicated for palm trees. B. Shrubs will be considered dead when 25 percent or more of plant has died. C. Inspect woody plants for health by scraping up to 1/16 inch square area of bark; no green cambium layer below bark shall be evidence of death. D. Adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles, ties, and trunk wrap as required to promote growth and avoid girdling. E. Fertilizing: Fertilize all trees at least once during maintenance period, preferably in the Fall; use accepted standards for determining type and method of fertilization. F. Pruning: Unless otherwise indicated, prune only to maintain balanced natural shape; follow recommendations of ANSI A300 and ANSI Z133.1 and best local practices for species involved. G. Shrubs: Prune at least once during maintenance period at best time to influence ultimate shape and size for the particular species. 1. Prune to balance the plant's form and according to its natural growth characteristics. 2. Remove water shoots, suckers, and branches not conforming to desired shape and size. H. Hedges: Trim to encourage growth into voids and gaps. I. Renovation of Established Trees: 1. Remove dead, damaged, and diseased branches and limbs and structurally weak limbs that may be a safety hazard. 2. Remove growth in front of windows, above or obstructing entranceways and walkways, and leaning against structures. 3. Remove growth obstructing traffic signs or vision at street intersections.
April 2011 32 0190 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 32 0190 10-9050 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
4. Remove branches that extend over buildings or otherwise endanger roofs. 5. Remove low-hanging branches over vehicular traffic routes to height necessary to clear expected traffic. 6. Remove excess growth by pruning technique best suited to future growth for the particular species. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove fallen deciduous leaves in Fall; removal may wait until all leaves have fallen. B. Clean adjacent pavements of plant debris and other debris generated by maintenance activities. C. Remove and dispose of general cleanup debris and biodegradable debris in a proper manner; Owner's trash collection facilities may be used. D. Remove and dispose of general cleanup debris and biodegradable debris in a proper manner. 1. Biodegradable Debris: Owner will designate a compost pile on site where biodegradable debris may be deposited; branches and bark are not considered biodegradable. 2. Branches and Bark: Owner will designate a wood chip storage area; machine-chip all branch and bark debris. 3. Non-Biodegradable Debris: Owner's trash collection facilities may be used. 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. 10 days prior to end of maintenance period, submit request for final inspection. B. Final inspection will be conducted by Owner. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 0190 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1216 10-9050 ASPHALT PAVING
SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Double course bituminous concrete paving. C. Surface sealer. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subgrade for paving. C. Section 32 1713 - Parking Bumpers: Concrete bumpers. D. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Pavement markings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types; The Asphalt Institute. B. AI MS-19 - A Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual; The Asphalt Institute. C. ASTM D 946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. D. State of Illinois Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standard. B. Mixing Plant: Conform to State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standard. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on private property. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. B. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 F degrees below bitumen supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: In accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. B. Sub-base aggregate maximum size, 1-1/2" C. Aggregate for Base Course: In accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. Maximum aggregate size for base courses over 6" thick 1-1/2", Other base course- 3/4". Compacted to 95%. D. Aggregate for Binder Course: In accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. E. Aggregate for Wearing Course: In accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. F. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards.
April 2011 32 1216 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1216 10-9050 ASPHALT PAVING
G. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter. H. Primer: Cut-back petroleum asphalt. Grade MC-250 I. Tack Coat: Uniformly Emulsified asphalt. grade SS-1H J. Seal Coat: AI MS-19, slurry type. 2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Base Course: State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. C. Binder Course: State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. D. Wearing Course: State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. E. Submit proposed mix design for review prior to beginning of work. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test mix design and samples in accordance with AI MS-2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that compacted granular base is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 BASE COURSE A. Place and compact base course. B. Bring sub-base course to required depths and profiles indicated. Extend sub-base course minimum 6 inches beyond bituminous pavement width. Place in layers not exceeding 4 inches in depth. Compact each layer to 95% of the maximum dry density obtained in accordance with ASTM Standard D 1557, Modified Proctor Method. Properly compact areas adjacent to curbs, catch basins, manholes, and other areas not accessible to rollers with mechanical or hand tamping devices. Ensure sub-base course materials are not contaminated with deleterious materials. C. Add water during compaction to bring granular material to optimum moisture content. D. Place base course materials over prepared sub-base to a compacted depth as indicated on the plans. Compact to 95% of the maximum dry density obtained in accordance with ASTM Standard D1557, Modified Proctor Method. Ensure top surface of base course is true to lines and grades indicated, with all points within 1/2 inch of elevations indicated. E. Add water during compaction to bring base course materials to optimum moisture content in accord with standard proctor test (ASTM D698). When excess moisture exists, rework base course materials until optimum moisture content is obtained. 3.03 PREPARATION - PRIMER A. Apply primer in accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. B. Ensure base course is dry and free of loose or foreign material before priming. C. Apply primer on prepared base course at uniform rate of 1/3 gal/sq yd. Ensure primer is at a temperature recommended by manufacturer. D. Apply primer to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters. E. Use clean natural sand to blot excess primer. 3.04 PREPARATION - TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat in accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards.
April 2011 32 1216 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1216 10-9050 ASPHALT PAVING
B. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces over subgrade surface at uniform rate of 1/3 gal/sq yd. C. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces. 3.05 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. B. Do not place bituminous pavement when surface is 40 degrees F or lower. Ensure asphalt pavement is minimum 280 degrees F immediately after placing and prior to initial rolling. C. Place binder course to compacted thickness as indicated on the plans. D. Place wearing course within two hours of placing and compacting binder course. E. Place wearing course to compacted thickness as indicated on the plans. F. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames and manhole frames in correct position and elevation. G. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density with rolling equipment approved by Architect/Engineer. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Start compaction as soon as pavement will bear equipment without checking or undue displacement. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. H. Execute compaction in three operations in pass sequence. Ensure each pass of roller overlaps previous passes to ensure smooth surface free of roller marks. Keep roller wheels sufficiently moist so as not to pick up material. I. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. J. Ensure joints made during paving operations are straight, clean, vertical and free of broken or loose material. Prime vertical surfaces of joints to ensure tight bond. K. Ensure surface of completed bituminous pavement is true to lines, profile and elevations indicated. 3.06 SEAL COAT A. Apply seal coat to surface course in accordance with State of Illinois Department of Transportation Highways standards. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch of specified or indicated thickness. C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for quality control. B. Provide field inspection and testing. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with AI MS-2. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 7 days or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 1216 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 32 1313 10-9050 CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, and gutters. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving. C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. C. State of Illinois Department of Transportation (IDOT): Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, adopted January 1, 1997, including all addenda. D. Accessibility Code (current issue) in accordance with the Environmental Barriers Act. E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. H. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. I. ASTM A 497/A 497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. J. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. K. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. L. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. M. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. N. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. O. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. P. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. Q. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. R. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. S. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. T. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). U. ASTM D 1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
April 2011 32 1313 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1313 10-9050 CONCRETE PAVING
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. C. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D 1752). 1. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A 185/A 185M; in flat sheets; unfinished. C. Dowels: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. B. Joint Sealer: Type as specified in Section 07 9005. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Concrete Properties: 1. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 2. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 2.06 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
April 2011 32 1313 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1313 10-9050 CONCRETE PAVING
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. Prepare subbase in accordance with State of Illinois Highways standards. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient in accord with IDOT specification. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as indicated. B. Place reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. C. Provide doweled joints at with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Place concrete to pattern indicated. E. Retamping will not be allowed except at exposed aggregate areas. F. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4'. G. Once started, place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Continue placing until panel or section is complete; keep top surfaces level. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joint occur. H. Weather conditions: 1. Concrete temperatures when deposited: a. Minimum: 50 degrees F b. Maximum: 85 degrees F 2. Cold weather concreting: Comply with ACI 306 except as follows: a. In freezing weather, provide suitable means for maintaining concrete temperature at a minimum of 70 degrees F for three days, or 50 degrees F for five days after placing b. Cooling of concrete to outside temperature: not faster than 1 degree F per hour for the first day and 2 degrees F per hour thereafter until outside temperature is reached. c. Maximum temperature of concrete produced with heated aggregate, heated water, or both at any time during its production or transportation: 90 degrees F. d. Do not mix salt, chemicals or other foreign materials in concrete to prevent freezing or to accelerate hardening of concrete, except as approved by Architect/Engineer. I. Slabs on Aggregate Base: 1. Provide aggregate base as specified. 2. Place concrete for all slabs continuously between construction joints; consolidate by vibration. Bring to level with a straight edge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to
April 2011 32 1313 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1313 10-9050 CONCRETE PAVING
force coarse aggregate down and to produce a smooth surface, free from lumps and hollows. 3. Saw cut control joints in locations shown on Drawings, as soon as operation can be performed without marring or tearing concrete surface, within 24 hours after finishing. Use 3/16" thick blade, cutting 1/4 into depth of slab thickness. 4. Pitch to drains 1/4"/ft. nominal, except as otherwise indicated on drawings. 3.07 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. 2. Place joint filler between paving components and buildings and other appurtenances. C. Provide scored joints: 1. At intervals as shown on drawings. 2. Between sidewalks and curbs. D. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.08 FINISHING A. Finish all concrete in accord with IDOT specification, Section 504.14 Paving: Wood float. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius. C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. D. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Exterior slabs: trowel to a smooth, dense surface. Finish with a fine-hair push broom, perpendicular to the direction of pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Finish to Class B tolerance per ACI 301. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07 9005 for joint sealer requirements. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. 3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
April 2011 32 1313 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1313 10-9050 CONCRETE PAVING
3.12 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. 3.13 SCHEDULES A. Concrete Sidewalks and Median Barrier: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick, buff color Portland cement, exposed aggregate finish. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 1313 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 32 1713 10-9050 PARKING BUMPERS
SECTION 32 1713 - PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. D. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Nominal Size: 6 inches high, 8 inches wide, 7 feet long. 2. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends and drainage slots on underside. 3. Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland Type II - Sulfate Resistant; white color. 4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 33 aggregate, water, and sand. 5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed steel bars; galvanized finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 3500 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 8. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 9. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 10. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. B. Dowels: Steel, galvanized finish; 3/4 inch diameter, 6 inch long, pointed tip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 1713 - 1
Wallace Place Apartments 32 1723.13 10-9050 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 32 1723.13 - PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, arrows, handicapped symbols, and curb markings. B. Roadway lane markings and crosswalk markings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association. B. FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov. C. IDOT - Illinois Department of Transportation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. 1. Roadway Markings: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Parking Lots: Yellow. 3. Handicapped Symbols: Blue. B. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
April 2011 32 1723.13 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1723.13 10-9050 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. E. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. F. Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Architect, apply temporary markings of the color(s), width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed. 1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged. 2. At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown. E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3. Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 (. 4. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. G. Roadway Traffic Lanes: Use suitable mobile mechanical equipment that provides constant agitation of paint and travels at controlled speeds. 1. Conduct operations in such a manner that necessary traffic can move without hindrance. 2. Place warning signs at the beginning of the wet line, and at points well in advance of the marking equipment for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place small flags or other similarly effective small objects near freshly applied markings at frequent intervals to reduce crossing by traffic. 3. If paint does not dry within expected time, discontinue paint operations until cause of slow drying is determined and corrected. 4. Skip Markings: Synchronize one or more paint "guns" to automatically begin and cut off paint flow; make length of intervals as indicated. 5. Use hand application by pneumatic spray for application of paint in areas where a mobile paint applicator cannot be used. H. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. I. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated.
April 2011 32 1723.13 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 1723.13 10-9050 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method. F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 1723.13 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
SECTION 32 3223 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Segmental retaining walls made of modular concrete units with soil reinforcement. B. Engineering design. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Removal of unwanted trees, bushes, and debris. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough and finish grading. C. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. D. Section 31 2323 - Fill. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO M 288 - Standard Specification for Geotextiles; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM C 1372 - Standard Specification for Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units. D. ASTM D 422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. E. ASTM D 448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. F. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). G. ASTM D 1241 - Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses. H. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). I. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. J. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. K. ASTM D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. L. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. M. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. N. ASTM D 5321 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method. O. ASTM D 6706 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Geosynthetic Pullout Resistance in Soil. P. ASTM F 405 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings. Q. NCMA TR-127 - Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls; National Concrete Masonry Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Concrete Units: 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Test data on unit strength and shear resistance between units. 3. Test data on soil reinforcement connection. 4. Manufacturer's certification that units meet requirements of specification. 5. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
April 2011 32 3223 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
6. Installation methods. C. Soil Reinforcement: 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Manufacturer's certification that product meets requirements of specification. 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Installation methods. D. Shop Drawings: Engineering drawings for installation, including elevations, large-scale details of elevations, typical sections, details, and connections, soil reinforcement, and drainage provisions. 1. Include design data: Detailed design calculations showing compliance with specified design criteria and material evaluations performed in accordance with specified design standard, signed and sealed by Design Engineer. E. Preconstruction Soil Test Reports. F. Soil Reinforcement to Unit Connector: One connector. G. Design Engineer's Qualifications. H. Concrete Unit Manufacturer Qualifications. I. Installer Qualifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Engineer Qualifications: Provide design by or under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in the work of this section and licensed in Illinois and: B. Preconstruction Soil Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for compliance with design criteria. C. Product Testing: Performed by qualified independent testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified independent testing agency. D. Manufacturer Qualifications -- Concrete Units: Firm specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section and: 1. With not less than 2 years documented experience. 2. Whose products have been used on a minimum of five successfully completed projects similar in scope and size. E. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in design and installation of segmental retaining walls and: 1. With not less than 2 years documented experience. 2. Having site supervisor with verifiable qualified experience suitable for this project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products above ground on wood pallets or blocking, in manufacturer's unopened packaging, until ready for installation. B. Prevent excessive soil and mud from coming in contact with face of concrete units. C. Protect material from damage. Do not use damaged material. Remove damaged material from the site. D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Deliver to Owner matching replacement units comprising one (1) percent of those installed on the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
April 2011 32 3223 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
A. Segmental Concrete Units: 1. Rockwood Retaining Walls: www.rockwoodwalls.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RETAINING WALLS A. Contractor is responsible for design of the retaining walls. B. Design Standard: Design retaining walls to be capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated, determined in accordance with NCMA TR 127 Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls; perform all stability analyses specified in this standard. 1. In addition, comply with applicable local, state, and federal codes and regulations. 2. This design method considers potential failure modes categorized by external, internal, local, compound, and global stability. 3. Provide engineering services as required for analysis for all modes of stability. 4. Use of design software for calculations is permitted. 5. Submit complete shop drawings showing all features of the design. C. Shear Resistance: Design the wall not to exceed the capacity of materials and soils to resist shear: 1. Shear Resistance Between Units: Determine in accordance with NCMA SRWU-2. 2. Connection Between Units and Soil Reinforcement: Determine in accordance with NCMA SWRU-1. 3. Coefficient for Direct Shear of Reinforcement on Soil: Determine in accordance with ASTM D 5321 using soil similar in gradation and texture to that to be used for fill in the reinforced zone. D. Soil Reinforcement: 1. Test reinforcement to be used in accordance with ASTM D 6706 using soil taken from project site. 2. Do not use more than one type of reinforcement attached to units within the same wall; do not use products made by different manufacturers in the same wall; minimize the number of different reinforcement and filter products to avoid confusion in placement. 3. Walls Less Than 12 Feet (3.5 M) High: Use only one type of reinforcement of one grade and strength. 4. Length Back from Wall: Not less than dimensions shown on the drawings. 5. Long Term Design Strength of Reinforcement: Determine in accordance with NCMA TR 127: LTDS = Tult / (RFd + RFid + RFcr), where: a. Tult = Ultimate (tensile) strength, b. RFd = Reduction Factor for chemical and biological durability; minimum 1.1 for polyethylene and polypropylene, 1.15 for coated polyester geogrids, and 1.6 for polyester geotextiles; c. RFid = Reduction Factor for Installation Damage; d. RFcr = Reduction Factor for Creep; consistent with test procedure used for determining the ultimate strength. E. Drainage: Design to prevent water accumulation in retained soil; use drainage fill and drainage pipe as required; provide outlets at 50 foot intervals along length of wall, minimum. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Retaining Wall Units: Machine-formed concrete blocks of shapes and sizes suitable for the retaining wall configuration required and complying with ASTM C 1372 and the following: 1. Color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard line of colors. 2. Texture: Split face, on all exposed surfaces. 3. Face Shape: Straight (flat). 4. Moisture Absorption: 8 percent, maximum.
April 2011 32 3223 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
B. Cap Units: Portland cement concrete machine-formed solid blocks, matching segmental concrete units, complying with ASTM C 1372, with abutting edges saw cut or formed to provide tight fitting, flush end-to-end joints. 1. Depth: To fully cover wall units. 2. Masonry Adhesive: To secure cap units as top course of wall. a. Expected Life Span: 30 years. b. Provide adhesive conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as approved by unit manufacturer. C. Shear Connectors: Connection method to withstand design stresses and prevent movement of segmental units, and to hold soil reinforcement in proper design position during grid pre-tensioning and backfilling. 1. Maintain strength over design temperature range of minus 10 degrees F to plus 100 degrees F. D. Soil Reinforcement: Polymeric geosynthetic specifically fabricated for use as soil reinforcement, dimensionally stable and able to retain geometry under manufacture, transport, and installation. 1. Polymeric Material: 100 percent virgin resin with maximum of 5 percent in-plant regrind material; polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyester. a. Polyethylene and Polypropylene: Stabilized with long term antioxidants. b. Polyester: Minimum molecular weight of 25,000 and carboxyl end group number less than 30. 2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 3. UV Resistance: 70 percent after 500 hours, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355. 4. Durability: Comply with minimum requirements of AASHTO M 288 Class 1; minimum mass of 8 oz/sq yard. E. Drainage Filter: Geosynthetic textile. 1. Apparent Opening Size: 70 to 100 U.S. Sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 3. Durability: Comply with minimum requirements of AASHTO M 288 Class 1; minimum mass of 8 oz/sq yard. F. Aggregate for Leveling Pad: Compacted sand, gravel, or crushed rock complying with one of the following: 1. Meeting requirements of ASTM D 1241, Gradation C. 2. Do not use pea gravel. G. Concrete for Leveling Pad: Unreinforced concrete with compressive strength of 3,000 psi H. Drainage Fill: Clean, freely draining aggregate placed within, between, or immediately behind segmental units; do not use pea gravel; use one of the following: 1. Aggregate as approved by Architect. 2. Aggregate meeting requirements of ASTM D 448, Size No. 57. 3. Crushed stone or coarse gravel, 3/8 to; no more than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 4. Crushed stone or coarse gravel, meeting requirements of ASTM D 422. I. Reinforced Backfill: Compacted soil placed behind drainage fill within reinforced soil mass; do not use heavy clay or organic soils; comply with one of the following: 1. Use site-excavated or other soil approved by Architect. 2. Granular soil with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 3. Inorganic ASTM D 2487 soil types GP, GW, SP, or SM, free of debris. a. Maximum Size: 3/4 inch, unless approved by Design Engineer, and design strength reduced to account for additional installation damage. b. Plasticity of Fines: Less than 10. Liquid Limit: Less than 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
April 2011 32 3223 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
J. Drainage Pipe: Perforated PVC, complying with ASTM D 3034; or corrugated HDPE complying with ASTM F 405;. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. B. Protect adjacent structures from the effects of excavation. C. Verify that layout dimensions are correct and substrate is in proper condition for installation. D. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions. E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Excavation: 1. Excavate to lines and grades shown on drawings. 2. Do not disturb embankment or foundation beyond lines. Minimize over-excavation; fill over-excavated areas with compacted reinforced backfill or leveling pad material at Contractor's expense. 3. After excavation, and prior to placement of leveling materials, Geotechnical Engineer will examine bearing soil surface to verify strength meets or exceeds design requirements and assumptions. 4. Replace unsuitable bearing soil as directed by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Leveling Pad: 1. Width: 6 inches minimum extension beyond front and back faces of units. 2. In lieu of pad made solely of aggregate or concrete, pad may be 3 inches, minimum, of thick compacted sand or crushed rock, covered with 2 inches to 3 inches of unreinforced concrete. 3. Location: Top of pad at 1 inch below grade for each 8 inches that wall extends above grade. 4. Compact aggregate to lines and grades on drawings, in lifts 6 inches thick, maximum. 5. Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 36 inches of back of wall. C. Verify level grade before proceeding. D. Install drainage collection pipe with a continuous fall in the direction of flow. Cap open ends as necessary to prevent soil and debris from entering. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with drawings, manufacturer instructions, and applicable codes and regulations. B. Segmental Concrete Units: 1. Place first course of units on leveling pad; check alignment and level. Check for full contact with base and for stability. 2. Place units side by side for full length of wall, aligning back face of straight walls using string line or offset from base line and back face of curved walls using flexible pipe or other method recommended by manufacturer 3. Do not leave gaps between units. 4. Lay out corners and curves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not leave gaps to produce wall batter or curvature. 5. Cut blocks with saw; do not split units. 6. Sweep excess material from tops of units before laying succeeding courses. 7. Place succeeding courses. Check for proper alignment and batter. 8. Where top of wall changes elevation, step units to match grade or turn top course into embankment. 9. Where bottom of wall changes elevation, step base leveling pad and extend lowest course a minimum of two units into slope.
April 2011 32 3223 - 5 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
C. Soil Reinforcement: Install each layer on fully compacted fill. 1. Orient soil reinforcement material with highest strength axis perpendicular to wall alignment. 2. Attach to top of wall units and extend horizontally, full length, over compacted backfill. 3. Install in one piece lengths with 100 percent coverage in each layer at each level. Do not splice or leave gaps between panels or ends of pieces. D. Drainage Fill: Place drainage fill in, between, and behind units. 1. Compact to lines and grades on drawings, in lifts 6 inches thick, maximum; decrease lift thickness where necessary to achieve required density. 2. Extend drainage fill 6 inches beyond back face of units. E. Backfill: Place, spread, and compact backfill from behind drainage fill to undisturbed soil. 1. Use only lightweight hand-operated compaction equipment within 3 ft from back wall face, or one half of wall height, whichever is greater. 2. Place backfill in lifts of maximum 6 inches to 8 inches loose thickness where hand compaction is used and 8 inches to 10 inches 3. Compact backfill to 95 percent of maximum density, standard Proctor, as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698, or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer. 4. Moisture content of backfill prior to and during compaction to be within plus 1 or minus 3 percentage points dry of optimum and uniform throughout each layer. 5. Do not operate tracked construction equipment directly upon soil reinforcement. 6. At end of each day, slope top of backfill away from wall to direct runoff away from wall face. Prevent runoff from adjacent areas from entering wall site. 7. At completion, if other work adjacent to wall is not to be done immediately (paving, landscaping, etc), grade top of backfill and provide temporary drainage to prevent water runoff toward the wall. F. Cap Units: Install and top two courses of units with masonry adhesive. 1. Clear cap units and top course of segmental concrete units of debris and standing water before applying adhesive. 2. Apply masonry adhesive to top surface of top unit and place cap into position over projecting pins. Protect wall face from masonry adhesive. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top of Wall: 1. Plan Location: Maximum of plus/minus 1 inch from plan location. 2. Elevation: Maximum of plus/minus 1-1/2 inch from elevations shown on drawings. B. Face of Wall Flatness: Measured as deviation from a straight edge. 1. In the Vertical Dimension: Plus/minus 1-1/2 inch per 10 foot section. 2. In the Horizontal Dimension of Straight Walls: Plus/minus 1-1/2 inch per 10 foot section. C. Overall Wall Batter: Within 2 degrees of design, measured from the vertical. D. Gap Between Adjacent Units: 1/8 inch, maximum. 3.05 CLEANING A. Replace damaged units prior to substantial completion. B. Clean wall face to remove debris and stains. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Prevent damage to wall and earthwork by subsequent construction and uncontrolled runoff until substantial completion; repair damage due to failure to protect wall or earthwork. B. Do not operate heavy paving or grading equipment within 36 inches from the back of the wall face. C. Do not operate equipment with wheel loads in excess of 150 psf live load within 10 feet from the wall face.
April 2011 32 3223 - 6 Wallace Place Apartments 32 3223 10-9050 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
D. Do not place temporary soil or fill stockpiles adjacent to wall. E. Replace damaged units prior to substantial completion. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 3223 - 7
Wallace Place Apartments 32 9219 10-9050 SEEDING
SECTION 32 9219 - SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Placing topsoil. C. Seeding, mulching and fertilizer. D. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Topsoil samples. C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture: 1. Kentucky Blue Grass: 50 percent. 2. Creeping Red Fescue Grass: 20 percent. 3. Norlea Perennial Rye: 30 percent. 2.02 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. B. Fertilizer: Commercial; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, to the following proportions: 1. Nitrogen: 2 percent. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 4 percent.
April 2011 32 9219 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9219 10-9050 SEEDING
3. Soluble Potash: 2 percent. C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. D. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting, open weave. E. Edging: PVC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 2200. B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 31 2200. C. Install edging at periphery of seeded areas in straight lines to consistent depth. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a rate of 5 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. D. Roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 112 lbs. E. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. F. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. G. Following germination, immediately re-seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4 by 4 inches. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 3 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water. B. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
April 2011 32 9219 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9219 10-9050 SEEDING
C. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. D. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary. E. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming. F. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. G. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. H. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. I. Immediately reseed areas that show bare spots. J. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. K. Replace unsatisfactory material. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 9219 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 32 9223 10-9050 SODDING
SECTION 32 9223 - SODDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Placing topsoil. C. Fertilizing. D. Sod installation. E. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil material. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Topsoil material. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; Turfgrass Producers International. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source. C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum three years experience, and certified by the State of Illinois. B. Installer Qualifications: Company approved by the sod producer. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration. B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours. A. Furnish service and maintenance of sodded areas for two months from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sod: TPI, Approved Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated below; with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5 weeds per 1000 sq ft. Minimum age of 24 months, with root development that will support its own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners. 1. Kentucky Blue Grass Type.
April 2011 32 9223 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9223 10-9050 SODDING
B. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay, or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0. C. Fertilizer: Commercial; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, to the following proportions: 1. Nitrogen: 2 percent. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 4 percent. 3. Soluble Potash: 2 percent. D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Edging: PVC. 2.03 HARVESTING SOD A. Machine cut sod and load on pallets in accordance with TPI Guidelines. B. Cut sod in area not exceeding 1 sq yd, with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum 1 inch topsoil base. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 2200. B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 31 2200. C. Install edging at periphery of seeded areas in straight lines to consistent depth. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod. C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 LAYING SOD A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod smooth and tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining edging. F. On slopes 3 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod. G. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil. H. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.
April 2011 32 9223 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9223 10-9050 SODDING
B. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. C. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary. D. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming. E. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. F. Roll surface to remove irregularities. G. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. H. Immediately replace sod to areas that show deterioration or bare spots. I. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 9223 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 32 9300 10-9050 PLANTS
SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Topsoil bedding. C. New trees, plants, and ground cover. D. Relocated trees, plants, and ground cover. E. Mulch and Fertilizer. F. Maintenance. G. Tree Pruning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil material. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Topsoil material. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock. B. ANSI A300 Part 1 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations -- Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Maintenance -- Standard Practices. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section , and described in ANSI Z60.1. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method ; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. C. Submit list of plant life sources. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with three years experience. C. Tree Pruner Qualifications: Company specializing in pruning trees with proof of Arborist Certification. D. Tree Pruning: NAA - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees. E. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. B. Plant Materials: Certified by federal department of agriculture; free of disease or hazardous insects. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
April 2011 32 9300 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9300 10-9050 PLANTS
A. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. B. Protect and maintain plant life until planted. C. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above 90 degrees F. B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy plants. C. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. A. Maintain plant life for two months after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintenance to include: 1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. 2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides. 3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. 4. Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system. 5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas or other wounds. 6. Disease control. 7. Maintaining wrapping, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight. Repair or replace accessories when required. 8. Replacement of mulch. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANTS A. Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work. B. Planting Substitutions: 1. If unable to locate specified landscape materials, notify Owners Representative or Architect for alternative sources or substitutions. Adjustment will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. If replacements are down sized, credits to the Owner will be based on comparable cost differentials customary for material and sizes involved. 2. Plants shall be supplied at the sizes specified. Plants of larger size may be used if acceptable to the Owner and if size of roots or balls are increased proportionately. 2.02 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; minimum pH value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0. 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.. 1. Nitrogen: 5 percent. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 10 percent. 3. Soluble Potash: 10 percent.
April 2011 32 9300 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9300 10-9050 PLANTS
B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4 to 5; moisture content of 30 percent. C. Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates. D. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of plants. 2.04 MULCH MATERIALS A. Mulching Material: well aged species wood ground bark, free of growth or germination inhibiting ingredients. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Wrapping Materials: Balled, Burlapped, and Grade in accordance with American Standard for Nursery Stock; ANSI z60.1. B. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind pressure and resulting movement of plant life. C. Decorative Cover: Washed, River Rock. D. Membrane: 8 mil thick, black polyethylene. 2.06 TOP SOIL MIX A. A uniform mixture of 1 part peat and 3 parts topsoil by volume. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared subsoil are ready to receive work. B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage. C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil. C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil. D. Dig pits and beds 12 inches larger than plant root system. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 24 inches over area to be planted. Rake smooth. B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade. C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading. D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage. E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 12 inches. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil. C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 PLANTING
April 2011 32 9300 - 3 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9300 10-9050 PLANTS
A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Architect. B. Excavate planting pits for trees to a width 1-1/2 times diameter of tree ball and not less than 6 inches deeper than tree ball. Excavate planting pits or trenches for shrubs to a width of 1-1/2 times diameter of plant balls or containers, or 1'-0" wider than spread of roots (whichever is larger), and 3 inches deeper than required for positioning at proper height. C. Set plants vertical. D. When planting ground cover dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots. Space plants as indicated on drawings. E. Remove non-biodegradable root containers. F. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position. G. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full. H. At trees build a 3 inch high berm of topsoil beyond edge of excavations. Apply a 3 inch thick mulch of shredded hardwood bark, with a 3 foot diameter circle around deciduous trees. Apply mulch to the drip line of evergreen trees. I. At planting beds and shrubs form grade slightly dished, and bermed at edges of excavation. Apply a three inch thick mulch of shredded hardwood bark. Lift plant foliage above mulch. 3.06 PLANT RELOCATION AND RE-PLANTING A. Relocate plants as indicated by Architect. B. Replant plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared topsoil mixture, at a minimum depth of 6 inches under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball. C. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Place decorative cover and membrane, where indicated on drawings. B. Wrap deciduous shade and flowering tree trunks and place tree protectors. 3.08 PLANT SUPPORT A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following: 1. Tree Caliper: 1 to 2 inches; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties 2. Tree Caliper: 2 to 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn buckles 3.09 TREE PRUNING A. Perform pruning of trees as recommended in ANSI A300. B. Prune newly planted and existing trees and shrubs, as required to remove dead, broken, and split branches, improve natural shape, and thin out structure. C. When pruning do not remove more than 15 percent of branches. Do not prune back terminal leader. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. During periods of hot sun and wind at time of planting, provide protective cover for Ground Cover. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water. B. Irrigate sufficiently to saturate root system and prevent soil from drying out. C. Remove dead or broken branches and treat pruned areas or other wounds. D. Neatly trim plants where necessary.
April 2011 32 9300 - 4 Wallace Place Apartments 32 9300 10-9050 PLANTS
E. Immediately remove clippings after trimming. F. Water to prevent soil from drying out. G. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Control insect damage and disease. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturers instructions. I. Remedy damage from use of herbicides and pesticides. J. Replace mulch when deteriorated. K. Maintain wrappings, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight. Repair or replace accessories when required. END OF SECTION
April 2011 32 9300 - 5
Wallace Place Apartments 33 1116 10-9050 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
SECTION 33 1116 - SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire water lines. B. Valves and Fire hydrants. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 33 1300 - Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution: Disinfection of site service utility water piping. E. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust restraints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA C104/A21.4 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water; American Water Works Association. B. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association. C. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association. D. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association. E. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association. F. AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants; American Water Works Association. G. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association. H. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; American Water Works Association. I. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association. J. UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with municipality requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: 1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.
April 2011 33 1116 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 33 1116 10-9050 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
3. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket. 2.02 VALVES A. Underground gate valves: Valves shall have 360 degree sealing surfaces and shall be designed for use in very infrequent operation and for permanent duty in underground service. Accessories (bolts, glands, and gaskets) shall be in complete compliance with AWWA Specification and for 150 psi working pressure. Valve operator shall be of traveling-nut type, sealed, gasketed, and lubricated for underground services. Operator shall have sufficient number of turns to close to prevent water hammer. All valves shall open list and be equipped with AWWA operating nut. B. Valve boxes and extensions: Cast iron, two or three piece type with matching cover and marked "water". Furnish also as part of valve and cast iron box installation a valve operating wrench of length required for specifies depth of bury. C. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 2.03 HYDRANTS A. Hydrants: Type as required by utility company. B. Hose and Pumper Connection: Match sizes with utility company, two hose nozzles , one pumper nozzle. Comply with local fire department requirements. C. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel in color required by utility company. 2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 02316 and Section 31 2316.13. B. Cover: As specified in Section 02316 and Section 31 2316.13. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 3000. B. Manholes: Precast Concrete; ASTM C478 C. Manhole Frames, Covers, Gratings, and Steps: Gray Cast Iron Construction with Service Type Cast in Covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 TRENCHING A. See the sections on excavation and fill for additional requirements. B. See Sections 02315 and 02316 for additional requirements. C. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. D. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust restraint bearing on subsoil. E. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Maintain 10 foot separation of water main from sewer piping and in accordance with local code.
April 2011 33 1116 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 33 1116 10-9050 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical. C. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure minimum 4 ft of cover or as per local code. D. Install pipe to indicated elevation. E. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. F. Install grooved and shouldered pipe joints to AWWA C606. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. I. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 1300. J. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway. D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. E. Provide drainage pit filled with washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. F. Paint hydrants in accordance with Section 09 9000. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service to utility company requirements. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Pressure test water piping to 125 psi. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION
April 2011 33 1116 - 3
Wallace Place Apartments 33 1300 10-9050 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 33 1300 - DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disinfection of site domestic water lines and site fire water lines specified in Section 33 1116. B. Disinfection of building domestic water piping specified in Section 22 1005. C. Testing and reporting results. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 33 1116 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping. B. Section 15400 - Plumbing Piping: Disinfection of building domestic water piping system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWWA B300 - Hypochlorites; American Water Works Association. B. AWWA B301 - Liquid Chlorine; American Water Works Association. C. AWWA B302 - Ammonium Sulfate; American Water Works Association. D. AWWA B303 - Sodium Chlorite; American Water Works Association. E. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association. F. Standard Specification for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. C. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements. D. Disinfection report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. E. Bacteriological report: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of State of Illinois. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651. B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems, approved by governing authorities of Illinois. C. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the work of this Section.
April 2011 33 1300 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 33 1300 10-9050 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA B302, Ammonium Sulfate, AWWA B303, and Sodium Chlorite. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected , and pressure tested. B. Schedule disinfecting activity to coordinate with start-up, testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including related systems. 3.02 DISINFECTION A. Use method prescribed by the applicable state or local codes, or health authority or water purveyor having jurisdiction, or in the absence of any of these follow AWWA C651. B. Provide and attach equipment required to perform the work. C. Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system. D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. E. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal domestic water. F. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. G. Pressure test system to 125 psi. Repair leaks and re-test. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Test samples in accordance with AWWA C651 or requirements of local health department. END OF SECTION
April 2011 33 1300 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 33 3111 10-9050 SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
SECTION 33 3111 - SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers. C. Manholes and Covers D. Cleanout Access. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for cleanout base pad construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. B. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. D. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. E. AWWA C111/A21.11 - American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints For Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. F. Standard Specification for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois. G. Rock River Water Reclamation District Standards and Specifications. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections,manholes, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 26, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material. 1. Joints: ASTM D3212, flexible elastomeric seals. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.02 SANITARY MANHOLE
April 2011 33 3111 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 33 3111 10-9050 SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
A. Lid and Frame: Grey Cast iron construction with service type cast in covers : B. Shaft construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast Concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female joints, cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 16 inches. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03 3000, levelled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections. 2.03 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D 2321. C. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight. D. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. E. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system. 3.03 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. C. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. D. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. E. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION
April 2011 33 3111 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 33 4111 10-9050 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
SECTION 33 4111 - SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of drainage system to existing storm sewers. C. Manholes, Catch basins, Paved area drainage, Site surface drainage, and inlets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for cleanout base pad construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. B. ASTM C 76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. C. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. D. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. E. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. F. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. G. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. H. Illinois Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connections outside building, trenching, connection to existing storm sewers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced, ASTM C 76, Class IV; bell and spigot. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) rubber compression gasket joint.
April 2011 33 4111 - 1 Wallace Place Apartments 33 4111 10-9050 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.03 CATCH BASINS, INLETS, MANHOLES, CLEANOUTS, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS A. Manhole, Inlets and Catch basin Frames, Gratings, Steps, Lids and Drain Covers: Grey Cast iron with service type cast in covers. B. Shaft Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female. 2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2323. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 2316 and Section 02316 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D 2321. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal sewer system. 3.03 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. C. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. D. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with local code requirements. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.
April 2011 33 4111 - 2 Wallace Place Apartments 33 4111 10-9050 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
END OF SECTION
April 2011 33 4111 - 3
APPENDIX A
UL RATINGS
UL DESIGN NO. P545 UL DESIGN NO. U305 UL DESIGN NO. U340
BXUV.P545 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
BXUV.P545 Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Autho rities Having Jurisdictio n should be co nsulted in all cases as to the particular requirements co vering the installatio n and use of UL Listed or Classified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials. Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction. Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field. When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate methods of construction. Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered as Classified, Listed, or Recognized.
Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Design No. P545
March 10, 2010
Unrestrained Assembly Rating — 1 Hr.
Finish Rating — 24 or 25 Min (See Items 3 and 3A)
Load Restricted for Canadian Applications — See Guide BXUV7
1 of 4 4/15/2011 4:11 PM BXUV.P545 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
1. Roofing System* — Any UL Class A, B or C Roofing System (TGFU) or Prepared Roof Covering (TFWZ) acceptable for use over nom 15/32 in. thick wood structural panels, min. grade "C-D" or "Sheathing". Nom 15/32 in. thick wood structural panels secured to trusses with No. 6d ringed shank nails. Nails spaced 12 in. OC along each truss. Staples having equal or greater withdrawal and lateral resistance strength may be substituted for the 6d nails. Construction adhesive is optional.
2. Trusses — Pitch or Parallel chord trusses, spaced a max of 24 in. OC, fabricated from nom 2 by 4 lumber, with lumber oriented vertically or horizontally. Truss members secured together min.0.0356 in. thick galv steel plates. Plates have 5/16 in. long teeth projecting perpendicular to the plane of the plate. The teeth are in pairs facing each other (made by the same punch), fo rming a split to oth type plate. Each to o th has a chisel po int o n its o utside edge. These points are diagonally opposite each other for each pair. The top half of each tooth has a twist for stiffness. The pairs are repeated on approximately 7/8 in. centers with four rows of teeth per inch of plate width. Where the truss intersects with the interior face of the exterior walls, the min truss depth shall be 5-1/4 in. with a min roof slope of 3/12 and a min. area in the plane of the truss of 21 sq/ft. Where the truss intersects with the interior face of the exterior walls, the min truss depth may be reduced to 3 in. if the batts and blankets (Item 3) are used as shown in the abo ve illustration (Alternate Insulation Placement) and are firmly packed against the intersection of the bottom chords and the plywood sheathing.
3. Batts and Blankets* — (Optional) -Glass fiber insulation, secured to the wood structural panesl with staples spaced 12 in. OC o r to the trusses with 0.090 in. diam galv steel wires spaced 12 in. OC. Any glass fiber insulatio n bearing the UL Classification Marking as to Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance, having a min density of 0.5 pcf. As an o ptio n, the insulation may be fitted in the co ncealed space, draped o ver the resilient channel/gypsum wallbo ard ceiling membrane when resilient channels and gypsum wallbo ard attachment is mo dified as specified in Items 6 and 7. The Finish Rating is 24 min. when the insulatio n is draped o ver the resilient channels and gypsum bo ard ceiling membrane and 25 min. when it is installed on underside o f the plywo od deck o r when it is o mitted.
3A. Loose Fill Material* — As an alternate to Item 3 — Any thickness of lo o se fill material bearing the UL Classification Marking for Surface Burning Characteristics, having a min density of 0.5 pcf, fitted in the concealed space, draped over the resilient channel/gypsum wallbo ard ceiling membrane when resilient channels and gypsum wallbo ard attachment is mo dified as specified in Items 6 and 7. The finished rating when lo o se fill material is used has not been determined.
4. Air Duct* — Any UL Class 0 or Class 1 flexible air duct installed in acco rdance with the instructions provided by the damper manufacturer.
5. Ceiling Damper* — Nom 20 in. long by 18 in. wide by 2-1/8 in. high, fabricated from galvanized steel. Plenum box
2 of 4 4/15/2011 4:11 PM BXUV.P545 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
maximum size nom. 21 in. long by 18 in. wide by 16 in. high fabricated from either galavanized steel or Classified Air Duct Materials bearing the UL Class 0 or Class 1 rigid air duct material. Installed in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer. Max damper openings no t to exceed 180 sq in. per 100 sq ft o f ceiling area.
NAILOR INDUSTRIES INC — Types 0755, 0755A, 0756, 0756D, 0757, 0757D, 0757FP, 0757DFP, 0758, 0759, 0760, 0761, 0762, CRD5, CRD5D, CRD6, CRD6D, CRD6FP, CRD6DFP.
5A. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max no m 9 by 9 in. damper with Airz o ne fan installed in acco rdance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer. Max height of damper with fan shall be 11 in. Max damper openings not to exceed 180 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area.
PANAMEX GROUP INC — Type 0750HM
5B. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max plenum box size nom 19 in. long by 19 in. wide and 11-7/8 in. high fabricated fro m galv steel. Aggregate damper o penings shall not exceed 128 sq in. per 100 sq ft o f ceiling area. Damper installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
AIRE TECHNOLOGIES INC — Models: CRD model 50 w/Boot, CRD model 50EA w/Boot, CRD model 55 w/Boot, CRD model 55 EA w/Boot.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Model CRD 50-BT, CRD 50-EA-BT, CRD 55-BT, CRD 55 EA-BT
5C. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max plenum box size nom 13 in. long by 13 in. wide and 11-7/8 in. high fabricated fro m galv steel. Aggregate damper o penings shall not exceed 50 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Damper installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Model CRD 50-BT-6, CRD 50-EA-BT-6, CRD 55-BT-6, CRD 55 EA-BT-6, CRD50-w X-BT-6
5D. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max siz e ceiling o utlet in plenum box no m 12 in. lo ng by 12 in. wide. Plenum bo x fabricated from galv steel. Aggregate damper openings shall not exceed 72 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
AIRE TECHNOLOGIES INC — Models: CRD model 50 w/Boot, CRD model 50EA w/Boot, CRD model 55 w/Boot, CRD model 55 EA w/Boot.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Model CRD 50-95BT, CRD 50-EA-95BT, CRD 55-95BT, CRD 55 EA-95BT
5E. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max siz e ceiling o utlet in plenum bo x no m 16 in. lo ng by 16 in. wide. Aggregate damper openings shall not exceed 128 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Damper installed in acco rdance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Models CRD 50- FGPB-4.2, - 4.2 NI, -6.0, -6.0 NI; CRD50-EA-FGPB-4.2, -4.2 NI, -6.0, -6.0 NI.
5F. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max plenum box size nom 15 in. long by 15 in. wide and 11-7/8 in. high fabricated fro m galv steel. Aggregate damper o penings shall not exceed 72 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Damper installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Models 45-CRD-LT-BT and 45-CRD-LTD-BT
5G. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max siz e ceiling o utlet in plenum box no m 10 in. lo ng by 10 in. wide. Plenum bo x fabricated from galv steel. Aggregate damper openings shall not exceed 50 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Model 45-LTD-95-BT-4
5H. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max plenum box size nom 19 in. long by 15 in. wide and 11-7/8 in. high fabricated fro m galv steel. Aggregate damper o penings shall not exceed 96 sq in. per 100 sq ft of ceiling area. Damper installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions provided with the damper.
LLOYD INDUSTRIES INC — Model CRD50-w X-BT
5I. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max nom area shall be 324 sq in. Max square size shall be 18 in. by 18 in. Rectangular sizes not to exceed 324 sq in. with a max width of 18 in. Max height of damper shall be 14 in. Aggregate damper openings shall no t exceed 162 sq in. per 100 sq ft o f ceiling area. Damper installed in acco rdance with the manufacturers installatio n instructio ns pro vided with the damper. A steel grille (Item 9) shall be installed in acco rdance with installation instructio ns.
3 of 4 4/15/2011 4:11 PM BXUV.P545 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
C&S AIR PRODUCTS — Model RD-521
POTTORFF — Model CFD-521.
5J. Alternate Ceiling Damper* — Max nom area shall be 196 sq in. Max square size shall be 14 in. by 14 in. Rectangular sizes not to exceed 196 sq in. with a max width of 26 in. Max height of damper shall be 7 in. Aggregate damper openings shall no t exceed 98 sq in. per 100 sq ft o f ceiling area. Damper installed in accordance with the manufacturers installatio n instructio ns pro vided with the damper. A steel grille (Item 9) no t to exceed 144 in.2 shall be installed in acco rdance with installation instructions.
C&S AIR PRODUCTS — Model RD-521-BT
POTTORFF — Model CFD-521-BT.
6. Furring Channels — Resilient channels, nom. 1/2 in. deep by 2-3/8 in. wide at the base and 1-3/8 in. wide at the face, fo rmed fro m 0.020 in. thick galv steel, spaced 16 in. OC, installed perpendicular to trusses. When batt and blanket material, Item 3, is draped over the resilient channel/gypsum wallbo ard ceiling membrane, the spacing shall be 12 in. OC. Channels secured to each truss with 1-1/4 in. long Type S steel screws. Channels overlapped 4 in. at splices. Channels oriented o ppo site at wallbo ard butt jo ints (spaced 6 in. OC) as sho wn in the abo ve illustratio n.
7. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, installed with lo ng dimensio n perpendicular to resilient channels with 1 in. lo ng Type S screws spaced 12 in. OC and lo cated a min o f 1/2 in. from side jo ints and 3 in. fro m the end jo ints. At end jo ints, two resilient channels are used, extending a min o f 6 in. beyo nd bo th ends o f the jo int. When batt and blanket insulatio n, Item 3, is draped o ver the resilient channel/gypsum wallbo ard ceiling membrane, screws shall be installed at 8 in. OC.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO — Types AG-C
TEMPLE-INLAND — Type TG-C
8. Finishing System — (Not Shown)— Vinyl, dry or premixed joint compound, applied in two coats to joints and screw- heads; paper tape, 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints. As an alternate, nom 3/32 in. thick veneer plaster may be applied to the entire surface of gypsum wallboard.
*Bearing the UL Classification Mark
Last Updated on 2010-03-10
Questions? Print this page Notice of Disclaimer Page Top
Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Fo llow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the repro ductio n o f the material co ntained in the Online Certificatio n Directo ry subject to the fo llowing co nditions: 1. The Guide Information, Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc." must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®"
4 of 4 4/15/2011 4:11 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
BXUV.U305 Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Autho rities Having Jurisdictio n should be co nsulted in all cases as to the particular requirements co vering the installatio n and use of UL Listed or Classified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials. Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction. Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field. When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate methods of construction. Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered as Classified, Listed, or Recognized.
Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Design No. U305
April 11, 2011
Bearing Wall Rating — 1 HR.
Finish Rating — See Items 3, 3A, 3D, 3E, 3F, 3G, 3H and 3I.
STC Rating - 56 (See Item 9)
Load Restricted for Canadian Applications — See Guide BXUV7
1 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
1. Wood Studs — Nom 2 by 4 in. spaced 16 in. OC max, effectively firestopped.
2. Joints and Nail-Heads — Joints covered with joint compound and paper tape. Joint compound and paper tape may be omitted when square edge boards are used. As an alternate, nom 3/32 in. thick gypsum veneer plaster may be applied to the entire surface of Classified veneer baseboard with the joints reinforced with paper tape. Nailheads exposed or covered with joint compound.
3. Gypsum Board* — 5/8 in. thick paper or vinyl surfaced, with beveled, square, or tapered edges, applied either ho riz ontally o r vertically. Gypsum panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement co ated nails 1-7/8 in. lo ng, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads. When used in widths other than 48 in., gypsum panels are to be installed horizontally. For an alternate method of attachment of gypsum panels, refer to Item 6, 6A or 6B, Steel Framing Members*.
When Item 6, Steel Framing Members*, is used, gypsum panels attached to furring channels with 1 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC.
When Item 6A, Steel Framing Members*, is used, two layers of gypsum panels attached to furring channels. Base layer attached to furring channels with 1 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. Face layer attached to furring channels with 1-5/8 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. All jo ints in face layers staggered with joints in base layers. One layer of gypsum board attached to opposite side of wood stud without furring channels as described in Item 3.
When Item 6B, Steel Framing Members*, is used, two layers of gypsum panels attached to furring channels. Base layer attached to furring channels with 1 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. Face layer attached to furring channels with 1-5/8 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. All jo ints in face layer staggered with joints in base layer a minimum o f 16 in. Jo ints oriented vertically and base layer staggered o n o ppo site sides o f the assembly. One layer of gypsum board attached to opposite side of wood stud without furring channels as described in Item 3.
When Item 7, resilient channels are used, 5/8 in. thick, 4 ft wide gypsum panels applied vertically. Screw attached furring channels with 1 in. lo ng, self-drilling, self-tapping Type S o r S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC, vertical jo ints lo cated midway between studs.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO — Types AGX-1(finish rating 23 min.), M-Glass (finish rating 23 min.), Type AGX-11 (finish rating 26 min) or Type AG-C
BEIJING NEW BUILDING MATERIALS PUBLIC
LTD CO — Type DBX-1 (finish rating 24 min).
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM INC — Type 1, Type SF3 (finish rating 20 min) or FRPC, ProRoc Type C or ProRoc Type X (finish rating 26 min), Type EGRG or GlasRoc (finish rating 23 min)
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM CANADA INC — ProRoc Type C, ProRoc Type X or ProRoc Type Abuse-Resistant (finish rating 26 min)
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SCX (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min).
GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM L L C — Type 5 (finish rating 26 min), Type 6 (finish rating 23 min), Type 9 (finish rating 26 min), Type C (finish rating 26 min), Type DGG (finish rating 20 min), Type GPFS1 (finish rating 20 min), Type GPFS2 (finish
2 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
rating 20 min), Type GPFS6 (finish rating 26 min), Type DS, Type DAP, Type DD (finish rating 20 min), DA, DAPC .
LAFARGE NORTH AMERICA INC — Type LGFC2 (finish rating 20 min), Type LGFC3 (finish rating 20 min), Type LGFC6 (finish rating 26 min), Type LGFC-C (finish rating 20 min), Type LGFC6A (finish rating 34 min), Type LGFC2A, Type LGFC-C/A, Type LGFC-WD.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — Type FSK (finish rating 20 min), Type FSK-G (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-2 (finish rating 24 min), Type FSW-3 (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-5 (finish rating 22 min), Type FSW-G (finish rating 20 min), Type FSK-C (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-C (finish rating 20 min), Type FSMR-C, Type FSW-6 (finish rating 20 min).
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — Riyadh, Saudi Arabia — Type FR, o r WR.
PABCO BUILDING PRODUCTS L L C, DBA
PABCO GYPSUM — Types C, PG-2 (finish rating 20 min), PG-3 (finish rating 20 min), Types PG-3W, PG-5W (finish rating 20 min), Type PG-4 (finish rating 20 min), Type PG-6 (finish rating 23 min), Types PG-3WS, PG-5WS (finish rating 20 min), Types PG-5, PG-9 (finish rating 26 min), PG-11 or Type PG-C.
PANEL REY S A — Type PRX; Types RHX, MDX, ETX (finish rarting 22 min)
SIAM GYPSUM INDUSTRY (SARABURI) CO LTD — Type EX-1 (finish rating 26 min)
TEMPLE-INLAND — Type X, Veneer Plaster Base - Type X, Water Rated - Type X, Sheathing - Type X, Soffit - Type X.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type SCX (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), Type FRX-G (finish rating 29 min), Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min).
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), SCX (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min).
3A. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 3) — 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels, with beveled, square, or tapered edges, applied either ho riz o ntally o r vertically. Gypsum panels fastened to framing with 1-1/4 in. lo ng Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws spaced a max 8 in. OC, with last screw 1 in. from edge of board. When used in widths of other than 48 in., gypsum bo ards are to be installed ho riz ontally.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO — Types AGX-1 (finish rating 25 min.), M-Glass (finish rating 25 min.), Type AG-C (finish rating 25 min.).
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min) , Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SCX (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min).
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type SCX (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), Type FRX-G (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min).
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type AR (finish rating 24 min), Type C (finish rating 24 min), Type WRX (finish rating 24 min), Type WRC (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X1 (finish rating 24 min), Type FCV (finish rating 24 min), Type IP-X2 (finish rating 24 min), Type SHX (finish rating 24 min), Type SCX, Type IP-AR (finish rating 24 min), Type IPC-AR (finish rating 24 min).
3B. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 3) — No m 3/4 in. thick, installed with 1-7/8 in. long cement coated nails as described in Item 3 or 1-3/8 in. long Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws as described in Item 3A.
3 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY — Types AR, IP-AR.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Types AR, IP-AR.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Types AR, IP-AR.
3C. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3, 3A and 3B) - 5/8 in. thick, 2 ft wide, tongue and groove edge, applied ho riz ontally to o ne side of the assembly. Installed with 1-7/8 in. long cement co ated nails as described in Item 3 o r 1-1/4 in. long Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws as described in Item 3A. Joint covering (Item 2) not required.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY — Type SHX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type SHX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type SHX.
3D. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (As an alternate to Items 3, 3A, 3B and 3C, not shown) - Nominal 5/8 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, applied vertically to studs and bearing plates o n one side o f the assembly with 1-5/8 in. lo ng Type S screws spaced 12 in. OC at perimeter o f panels and 8 in. OC in the field. Ho riz o ntal jo ints of vertically applied panels need not be backed by studs. Panel joints covered with paper tape and two layers of joint compound. Screwheads covered with two layers of joint compound. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity as described in Item 5E. Not evaluated for use with Steel Framing Members, Furring Channels or Fiber, Sprayed.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock QR-530 (finish rating 23 min).
3E. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3, 3A, 3B, 3C, or 3D -not shown) For Direct Application to Studs Only- No m 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with beveled, square o r tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical jo ints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Wallboard secured to studs with 1-5/8 in. long Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and in the field. Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints o f lead backed gypsum wallbo ard and o ptio nal at remaining stud lo catio ns. Lead batten strips, min 1-1/2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.125 in. placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with two 1 in. long Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip. Lead discs or tabs may be used in lieu of or in addition to the lead batten strips or optional at other locations. Max 3/4 in. diam by max 0.125 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered over steel screw heads or max 1/2 in. by 1-1/4 in. by max 0.125 in. thick lead tabs placed on gypsum boards underneath screw locations prior to the installation of the screws. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".
RAY-BAR ENGINEERING CORP — Type RB-LBG (finish rating 24 min).
3F. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3, 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, and 3E) — 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels, with square edges, applied either ho riz o ntally o r vertically. Gypsum panels fastened to framing with 1-1/4 in. long Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws spaced a max 8 in. OC, with last 2 screws 1 and 4 in. fro m edge o f bo ard o r nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads. When used in widths of other than 48 in., gypsum boards are to be installed horizontally.
TEMPLE-INLAND — GreenGlass Type X (finish rating 23 min).
3G. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3, 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, 3E and 3F) - 5/8 in. glass-mat faced with square edges, applied either ho riz o ntally o r vertically. Gypsum panels nailed 7 in. OC aro und the perimeter and in the field with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads. Nails shall be placed 1 inch and 3 inch from horizontal joints and 7 inch OC thereafter.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type USGX (finish rating 22 min.)
3H. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3 thro ugh 3G) - 5/8 in. thick paper surfaced applied vertically. Gypsum panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads.
TEMPLE-INLAND — Type X ComfortGuard Sound Deadening Gypsum Board (finish rating 27 min).
3I. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3) - Not to be used with items 6 or 7. 5/8 in. thick paper surfaced applied vertically only. Gypsum panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — SoundBreak XP Type X Gypsum Board
4 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
3J. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (As an alternate to Items 3 through 3I, not shown) — Nominal 5/8 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, applied vertically. Panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads. Panel joints covered with paper tape and two layers of joint compound. Nailheads covered with two layers of joint compound.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock ES (finish rating 21 min), Type QuietRo ck QR-527 (finish rating 24 min).
3K. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Items 3) - Not to be used with items 6 or 7. 5/8 in. thick paper surfaced applied vertically only. Gypsum panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads.
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM INC — Type SilentFX
3L. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 3) - 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels, with beveled, square, or tapered edges, applied either ho riz o ntally o r vertically. Gypsum panels fastened to framing with 1-1/4 in. lo ng Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws spaced a maximum 8 in. OC with the last screw 1 in. from the edge of the board. When used in widths other than 48 in., gypsum panels are to be installed horizontally.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — Type FSK (finish rating 20 min), Type FSK-G (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-2 (finish rating 24 min), Type FSW-3 (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-5 (finish rating 22 min), Type FSW-G (finish rating 20 min), Type FSK-C (finish rating 20 min), Type FSW-C (finish rating 20 min), Type FSMR-C, Type FSW-6 (finish rating 20 min).
4. Steel Corner Fasteners — (Optional) — Fo r use at wall co rners. Channel shaped, 2 in. lo ng by 1 in. high o n the back side with two 1/8 in. wide cleats protruding into the 5/8 in. wide channel, fabricated from 24 gauge galv steel. Fasteners applied only to the end or cut edge (not along tapered edges) of the gypsum board, no greater than 2 in. from corner of gypsum board, max spacing 16 in. OC. Nailed to adjacent stud through tab using one No. 6d cement coated nail per fastener. Corners of wall bo ard shall be nailed to to p and botto m plate using No. 6d cement co ated nails.
5. Batts and Blankets* — (Optio nal - Required when Item 6A is used ) Glass fiber or mineral wo ol insulatio n. Placed to co mpletely or partially fill the stud cavities. When Item 6A is used, glass fiber o r mineral wo ol insulatio n shall be placed to co mpletely fill the stud cavities and shall be secured to the studs 24 in. OC with staples, nails o r screws.
CERTAINTEED CORP
GUARDIAN FIBERGLASS INC
JOHNS MANVILLE INTERNATIONAL INC
KNAUF INSULATION GMBH
OWENS CORNING HT INC, DIV OF OWENS
CORNING — Corning Fiberglas Corp.
ROCK WOOL MANUFACTURING CO — Delta Board.
ROXUL ASIA SDN BHD — Acoustical Fire Batts
ROXUL INC — Acoustical Fire Batts
THERMAFIBER INC — Type SAFB.
5A. Fiber, Sprayed* — (Not shown - Not for use with Item 6A ) As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 5) — Spray applied cellulose material. The fiber is applied with water to completely fill the enclosed cavity in accordance with the applicatio n instructio ns supplied with the pro duct. Nominal dry density o f 3.0 lb/ft3. Alternate application method: The fiber is applied with U.S. Greenfiber LLC Type AD100 hot melt adhesive at a nominal ratio of one part adhesive to 6.6 parts fiber to co mpletely fill the enclosed cavity in acco rdance with the applicatio n instructio ns supplied with the pro duct. Nominal dry density of 2.5 lb/ft3.
U S GREENFIBER L L C — Co co o n2 Stabiliz ed o r Co co o n-FRM (Fire Rated Material)
5B. Fiber, Sprayed* — (Not shown - Not for use with Item 6A ) As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 5) and Item 5A - Spray applied cellulo se insulatio n material. The fiber is applied with water to interio r surfaces in acco rdance with the applicatio n instructio ns supplied with the pro duct. Applied to co mpletely fill the enclo sed cavity. Minimum dry density o f 4.3 pounds per cubic ft.
NU-WOOL CO INC — Cellulo se Insulatio n
5 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
5C. Batts and Blankets* — Required fo r use with resilient channels, Item 7, 3 in. thick mineral woo l batts, placed to fill interior of wall, attached to the 4 in. face of the studs with staples placed 24 in. OC.
THERMAFIBER INC — Type SAFB
5D. Glass Fiber Insulation — (As an alternate to Item 5C) — 3 in. thick glass fiber batts bearing the UL Classification Marking as to Surface Burning and/or Fire Resistance, placed to fill the interior of the wall, attached to the 4 in. face of the studs with staples placed 24 in. OC. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
5E. Batts and Blankets* — (Required for use with Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories, Item 3D) — Glass fiber insulatio n, nom 3-1/2 in. thick, min. density of 0.80 pcf, with a flame spread o f 25 o r less and a smo ke develo ped o f 50 o r less, frictio n-fitted to co mpletely fill the stud cavities. See Batts and Blankets Catego ry (BKNV) fo r names o f manufacturers.
5F. Fiber, Sprayed* — (Optional, Not Shown - Not for use with Item 6, 6A or 6B). As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 5) and Item 5A - Spray applied granulated mineral fiber material. The fiber is applied with water to co mpletely fill the enclosed cavity in accordance with the application instructions supplied with the product. See Fiber, Sprayed (CCAZ).
AMERROCK PRODUCTS L P — Rockwool
5G. Fiber, Sprayed* — (Optional, Not Shown - Not for use with Items6, 6A or 6B). As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 5) and Item 5A - Bro wn Co lo red Spray applied cellulose fiber. The fiber is applied with water to co mpletely fill the enclosed stud cavity in accordance with the application instructions supplied with the product. The minimum dry density shall be 4.30 lbs/ft3.
INTERNATIONAL CELLULOSE CORP — Celbar-RL
6. Steel Framing Members (Optional, Not Shown)* — Furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Ends of adjo ining channels are o verlapped 6 in. and tied together with do uble strand o f No . 18 SWG galv steel wire near each end o f o verlap. As an alternate, ends o f adjo ining channels may be overlapped 6 in. and secured together with two self-tapping #6 framing screws, min. 7/16 in. long at the midpoint of the overlap, with one screw on each flange of the channel. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 3.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 6a) to studs. Clips spaced 48 in. OC. RSIC-1 clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center grommet. RSIC-V clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center ho le. Furring channels are friction fitted into clips.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC — Types RSIC-1, RSIC-V.
6A. Steel Framing Members (Optional, Not Shown)* — Furring channels and Steel Framing Members on one side of studs as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Ends o f adjoining channels are overlapped 6 in. and tied together with double strand of No. 18 SWG galv steel wire near each end of overlap. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity as described in Item 5. Two layers of gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 3.
b. Steel Framing Members* — used to attach furring channels (Item 6Aa) to one side of studs only. Clips spaced 48 in. OC., and secured to studs with two No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screws, one through the hole at each end of the clip. Furring channels are friction fitted into clips.
KINETICS NOISE CONTROL INC — Type Isomax.
6B. Steel Framing Members (Optional, Not Shown)* — Furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Ends of adjo ining channels are o verlapped 6 in. and tied together with do uble strand o f No . 18 SWG galv steel wire near each end o f o verlap. As an alternate, ends o f adjo ining channels may be overlapped 6 in. and secured together with two self-tapping #6 framing screws, min. 7/16 in. long at the midpoint of the overlap, with one screw on each flange of the channel. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 6Ba) to studs. Clips spaced 48 in. OC. Genie clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center hole. Furring channels are frictio n fitted into clips.
PLITEQ INC — Type Genie Clip
6 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
7. Furring Channel — Optional - Not Shown - For use on one side of the wall - Resilient channels, 25 MSG galv steel, spaced vertically 24 in. OC, flange portion screw attached to one side of studs with 1-1/4 in. long diamond shaped point, do uble lead Phillips head steel screws. When resilient channels are used, insulatio n, Items 5C o r 5D is required.
7A. Steel Framing Members* — Optio nal - No t Sho wn - Used as an alternate metho d to attach resilient channels (Item 7) to o ne side o f studs o nly. Clips attached at each intersectio n of the resilient channel and the wo od studs (Item 1). Resilient channels are frictio n fitted into clips, and then clips are secured to the wo o d stud with min. 1-3/4 in. lo ng diamo nd shaped po int, do uble lead Phillips head steel screws thro ugh the center ho le o f the clip and the resilient channel flange.
KEENE BUILDING PRODUCTS CO INC — Type RC Assurance.
8. Caulking and Sealants — (not shown, optional) A bead of acoustical sealant applied around the partition perimeter for sound control.
9. STC Rating — The STC Rating of the wall assembly is 56 when it is constructed as described by Items 1 through 6, except:
A. Item 2, abo ve - Nailheads Shall be co vered with jo int compo und.
B. Item 2, above - Joints As described, shall be covered with fiber tape and joint compound.
C. Item 5, above - Batts and Blankets* The cavities formed by the studs shall be friction fit with R-19 unfaced fiberglass insulation batts measuring 6-1/4 in. thick and 15-1/4 in. wide.
D. Item 6, above - Steel Framing Members* Type RSIC-1 clips shall be used to attach gypsum board to studs on either side o f the wall assembly.
E. Item 8, above - Caulking and Sealants (not shown) A bead of acoustical sealant shall be applied around the partition perimeter for sound control.
F. Steel Corner Fasteners (Item 4), Fiber, Sprayed (Items 5A and 5B ) and Steel Framing Members (Item 6A), not evaluated as alternatives for obtaining STC rating.
10. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (Optio nal, No t sho wn) — No minal 1/2 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, fo r optional use as an additional layer on one or both sides of the assembly. Panels attached in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. When the QR-510 panel is installed between the wood framing and the UL Classified gypsum board, the required UL Classified gypsum board layer(s) is/are to be installed as indicated as to fastener type and spacing, except that the required fastener length shall be increased by a minimum of 1/2 in. Not evaluated or intended as a substitute for the required layer(s) of UL Classified Gypsum Board.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock QR-510.
11. Cementitious Backer Units* — (Optio nal Item No t Sho wn - Fo r Use On Face Of 1 Hr Systems With All Standard Items Required) - 1/2 in., 5/8 in., 3/4 in. o r 1 in. thick, min. 32 in. wide.- Applied vertically or ho riz ontally with vertical joints centered over studs. Fastened to studs and runners with cement board screws of adequate length to penetrate stud by a minimum of 3/8 in. for steel framing members, and a minimum of 3/4 in. for wood framing members spaced a max of 8 in. OC. When 4 ft. wide boards are used, horizontal joints need not be backed by framing.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — Type PermaBase
12. Non-Bearing Wall Partition Intersection — (Optional) —Two nominal 2 by 4 in. studs or nominal 2 by 6 in. studs nailed to gether with two 3 in. lo ng 10d nails spaced a max. 16 in. OC. vertically and fastened to o ne side o f the minimum 2 by 4 in. stud with 3 in. lo ng 10d nails spaced a max. 16 in. OC. vertically. Intersectio n between partitio n wo o d studs to be flush with the 2 by 4 in. studs. The wall partition wood studs are to be framed by with a second 2 by 4 in. wood stud fastened with 3 in. lo ng 10d nails spaced a max. 16 in. OC. vertically. Maximum o ne no n-bearing wall partitio n intersectio n per stud cavity. Non-bearing wall partition stud depth shall be at a minimum equal to the depth of the bearing wall.
13. Mesh Netting — (Not shown) - Any thin, woven or non-woven fibrous netting material attached with staples to the o uter face of o ne ro w o f studs to facilitate the installatio n of the sprayed fiber fro m the o pposite row.
*Bearing the UL Classification Mark
Last Updated on 2011-04-11
Questions? Print this page Notice of Disclaimer Page Top
Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Fo llow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the repro ductio n o f the material co ntained in the Online Certificatio n Directo ry subject to the fo llowing co nditions: 1. The Guide Information, Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc." must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®"
7 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U305 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
8 of 8 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U340 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
BXUV.U340 Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Autho rities Having Jurisdictio n should be co nsulted in all cases as to the particular requirements co vering the installatio n and use of UL Listed or Classified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials. Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction. Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field. When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate methods of construction. Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered as Classified, Listed, or Recognized.
Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Design No. U340
June 14, 2010
Bearing Wall Rating — 1 Hr.
Finish Rating — See Item 2
Load Restricted for Canadian Applications — See Guide BXUV7
1 of 4 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U340 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
HORIZONTAL SECTION
1. Wood Studs — Nom 2 by 4 in. alternating on opposite sides of nom 2 by 6 in. wood plates. Spaced 24 in. OC max on each side of wood plates, staggered 12 in. OC on opposite side.
2. Gypsum Board* — 5/8 in. thick wallboard, paper or vinyl faced with beveled, square, tapered or rounded edges. Wallboard nailed to each stud 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails, 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 1/4 in. diam head. As an alternate, No. 6 bugle head drywall screws, 1-7/8 in. long, may be substituted for the 6d cement coated nails. When used in widths o ther than 48 in., wallboard to be installed ho riz o ntally.
When Steel Framing Members* (Item 5) are used, wallboard attached to furring channels with 1 in. long Type S bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO — Types AG-C.
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM INC — Type FRPC (Finish rating 20 min), Pro Ro c Type C.
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM CANADA INC — ProRoc Type C.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY — Types C, IP-X2 (Finish rating 26 min).
GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM L L C — Types 5 (Finish rating 26 min), DAPC.
LAFARGE NORTH AMERICA INC — Types LGFC-C, LGFC-C/A.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO — Types FSK-C, FSW-C, FSW-G.
PABCO BUILDING PRODUCTS L L C, DBA
PABCO GYPSUM — Type C or PG-C.
TEMPLE-INLAND — Type TG-C.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Types C, IP-X2 (Finish rating 26 min).
2A. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (As an alternate to Item 2, not shown) - Nominal 5/8 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, applied vertically to studs and bearing plates on o ne side o f the assembly with 1-5/8 in. lo ng Type S screws spaced 12 in. OC at perimeter of panels and 8 in. OC in the field. Horizontal joints of vertically applied panels need not be backed by studs. Panel joints covered with paper tape and two layers of joint compound. Screwheads covered with two layers of joint compound. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity as described in Item 4B. Not evaluated for use with Steel
2 of 4 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U340 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
Framing Members, Furring Channels or Fiber, Sprayed.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock QR-530 (finish rating 23 min).
2B. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 2) — 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels, with beveled, square, or tapered edges, applied either ho riz o ntally o r vertically. Gypsum panels fastened to framing with 1-1/4 in. lo ng Type W coarse thread gypsum panel steel screws spaced a max 8 in. OC, with last screw 1 in. from edge of board. When used in widths of other than 48 in., gypsum bo ards are to be installed ho riz ontally.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO — Type AG-C.
2C. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (As an alternate to Item 2 and 2A) — Nominal 5/8 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, applied vertically. Panels nailed 7 in. OC with 6d cement coated nails 1-7/8 in. long, 0.0915 in. shank diam and 15/64 in. diam heads. Horiz o ntal jo ints o f vertically applied panels to be backed by studs.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock ES, Type QuietRock QR-527.
3. Joints and Nailheads — Wallboard joints covered with tape and joint compound. Nail heads covered with joint compound. As an alternate, nom 3/32 in. thick gypsum veneer plaster may be applied to entire surface of Classified veneer baseboard. Joints reinforced.
4. Batts and Blankets* — (Optio nal) — 3-1/2 in. max. thickness glass o r mineral fiber batt insulatio n stapled to studs.
See Batts and Blankets (BZJZ) category for list of Classified companies.
4A. Fiber, Sprayed* — As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 4) — Spray applied cellulose material. The fiber is applied with water to co mpletely fill the enclo sed cavity in acco rdance with the applicatio n instructions supplied with the pro duct. No minal dry density o f 3.0 lb/ft3. Alternate applicatio n metho d: The fiber is applied with U.S. Greenfiber LLC Type AD100 ho t melt adhesive at a nominal ratio of o ne part adhesive to 6.6 parts fiber to co mpletely fill the enclo sed cavity in acco rdance with the applicatio n instructio ns supplied with the pro duct. No minal dry density of 2.5 lb/ft3.
U S GREENFIBER L L C — Co co o n2 Stabiliz ed o r Co co o n-FRM (Fire Rated Material)
4B. Batts and Blankets* — (Required for use with Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories, Item 2A) — Glass fiber insulatio n, nom 3-1/2 in. thick, min. density of 0.80 pcf, with a flame spread o f 25 o r less and a smo ke develo ped o f 50 o r less, frictio n-fitted to co mpletely fill the stud cavities. See Batts and Blankets Category (BKNV) for names of manufacturers.
U S GREENFIBER L L C — Co co o n2 Stabiliz ed o r Co co o n-FRM (Fire Rated Material)
4C. Fiber, Sprayed* — As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 4) - Spray applied cellulose fiber. The fiber is applied with water to co mpletely fill the enclo sed cavity in acco rdance with the applicatio n instructio ns supplied with the pro duct. The minimum dry density shall be 4.30 lbs/ft3.
INTERNATIONAL CELLULOSE CORP — Celbar-RL
5 Steel Framing Members (Optional, Not Shown)* — Furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described belo w:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Ends of adjoining channels are overlapped 6 in. and tied together with double strand of No. 18 SWG galv steel wire near each end of overlap. As an alternate, ends of adjoining channels may be overlapped 6 in. and secured to gether with two self-tapping #6 framing screws, min. 7/16 in. lo ng at the midpoint of the overlap, with one screw on each flange of the channel. Wallboard attached to furring channels as described in Item 2.
b. Steel Framing Members* — used to attach furring channels (Item a) to studs (Item 1) . Clips spaced 48 in. OC., and secured to studs with No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center grommet. Furring channels are friction fitted into clips.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC — Type RSIC-1.
6. Wall and Partition Facings and Accessories* — (Optio nal, No t shown) — No minal 1/2 in. thick, 4 ft wide panels, fo r optional use as an additional layer on one or both sides of the assembly. Panels attached in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. When the QR-510 panel is installed between the wood framing and the UL Classified gypsum board, the required UL Classified gypsum board layer(s) is/are to be installed as indicated as to fastener type and spacing, except that the required fastener length shall be increased by a minimum of 1/2 in. Not evaluated or intended as a substitute for the required layer(s) of UL Classified Gypsum Board.
SERIOUS MATERIALS INC — Type QuietRock QR-510.
7. Non-Bearing Wall Partition Intersection — (Optio nal) Two no minal 2 by 4 in. stud o r no minal 2 by 6 in. stud nailed
3 of 4 4/15/2011 4:13 PM BXUV.U340 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpag...
together with two 3in. long 10d nails spaced a max. 16 in. OC. vertically and fastened to one side of the minimum 2 by 4 in. stud with 3 in. long 10d nails spaced a max 16 in. OC. vertically. Intersectio n between partitio n wo o d studs to be flush with the 2 by 4 in. studs. The wall partition wood studs are to be framed by with a second 2 by 4 in. wood stud fastened with 3 in. lo ng 10d nails spaced a max. 16 in. OC. vertically. Maximum one no n-bearing wall partition intersection per stud cavity. No n-bearing wall partitio n stud depth shall be at a minimum equal to the depth o f the bearing wall.
*Bearing the UL Classification Mark
Last Updated on 2010-06-14
Questions? Print this page Notice of Disclaimer Page Top
Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Fo llow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the repro ductio n o f the material co ntained in the Online Certificatio n Directo ry subject to the fo llowing co nditions: 1. The Guide Information, Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc." must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "Copyright © 2011 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®"
4 of 4 4/15/2011 4:13 PM